Home

FX3S Series User`s Manual - Hardware Edition

1. User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices Fix the connector conversion adapter main body to the main unit with M3 S tapping screws G in the follow figure supplied as accessories of the S connector conversion adapter e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 2 Caution DD Mounting holes to be used vary depending on the power type of the main unit gt E Make sure to connect the connector conversion adapter main body using the proper mounting holes The iy main unit may be damaged if the proper mounting holes are not used Sa In the case of AC power type main unit In the case of DC power type main unit 3 3e g 7 5 4 Connecting method C connection of special adapter 5 UUs This subsection explains how to connect the special adapter to the main unit E S When connecting the special adapter it is necessary to attach the connector conversion adapter before the a8 special adapter using the method described in the preceding subsection Connection procedure 6 f SL Slide the special adapter connecting hooks 8 i 23 A in the right figure of the main unit J When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has been connected to the connector conversion adapter read connector conversion adapter as special adapter This applies to the following steps Connect the special adapter B in the right figure to the connector 33
2. 158 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test 3 Test mode operation 1 Press the OK button in the monitor mode to select the forced set reset mode However the forced set reset mode does not support Input X 2 Select a device using the and buttons The selected device is indicated by flashing underline 3 When the OK button is pressed the current ON OFF status is reversed 4 To return to the device selection screen press ESC button 159 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS mY 10 buum OO sesp SNOEN wh Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi OOO on 5 a L m a D 5 n O 5 NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig a s Howay Ni y sseN 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test 16 5 4 When Timer T is selected Monitoring and testing can be performed for the timer T 1 Description of display Display Content 1 2 is i 5 1 Displayed device i Ws aV eVa 2 Displayed device No H O N R 3 Hexadecimal esse H w 4 ON OFF status T t T E 5 Reset M j7 7 6 Current value wk ante 7 7 Setting value 1 Displayed when a hexadecimal is specified
3. gt Press the OK button _ Press other button of the display module C gt Error occurrence Refer to Section 16 5 156 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test 16 5 Monitor Test z gt D 16 5 1 Relevant devices amp Monitoring and testing can be performed from the Monitor Test menu for the devices listed below 1 2 v Possible LI Not possible Item not supported by this device O Device E Current Setting Forced Current Value Setting Value Value ON OFF Change Change mE 2 State 6 Se oe canter peepee 7 44 JEg Sga 2 8 a 1 The forced ON OFF processing for devices Y M and S is executed once by the END instruction executed after the button is pressed However if there are devices Y M and S driven by the OUT instruction in the program the instruction execution result is reflected Qi OOO 225 ouv 5 a L m az D 5 2 O 5 16 5 2 Selecting a device A device to be monitored and tested can be selected 1 Description of display E lt _ Display Content PB 1 Displayed device 25 x 3a 2 32 bit display D 1 Displayed when a data register D is selected 1 7 O 28 D O a 2 Device selection operation 1 Select device using the and buttons When the button is pressed selected device is changed in the following order Data register D
4. MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs Installation Accessories DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type 143 Boyeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 Buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja sgueu zuleN uny SOL O E e 4 nN O r Q IXJ 1940 a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig a s owog N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS Sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Special Adapters 15 1 6 FX3U 4AD TC ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Accessories Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type O 9 v ee mounting hole pitch 15 1 7 FX3u 232ADP MB External Dimensions e MASS Weight Approx 80 g 0 18 Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Accessories Manual supplied with E product T e Connector RS 232C D SUB 9 pin a male Oe 3 Pin configuration 1 CD DCD 5 2 RD RXD 4 i o 9 3 SD TXD
5. For details on programming refer to the programming manual 9 4 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals Input i number Contact on sequence program ON duration of input signal X000 M8170 10 us or more X001 M8171 X002 M8172 X003 M8173 50 us or more X004 M8174 X005 M8175 9 4 2 Cautions for pulse catch 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch SPD instruction ZRN instruction DSZR instruction and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers 2 Cautions in wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 9 4 3 Examples of external wiring UOI ONPO U It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 Examples of pulse catch M8170 wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it according to the following diagrams NO 1 When 24 V DC service power supply is used Fuse Fuse Class D grounding Class D grounding a nee ee o re SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou yONpold suoneoyioeds Aa Qi s39149q jesouduad pue UOISJ3 1 1 N _
6. 4 2 Power Supply Specifications The power supply specifications for the main unit are explained below 4 2 1 AC power type ae Specification FX3S 10MU EO FX3S 14MU EO FX3S 20MU EO FX3S 30MU EO Supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC Allowable supply voltage range 85 to 264 V AC Rated frequency 50 60 Hz a Pegi acne ea Prete Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or less Power fuse 250V1A Rush current 15 Amax 5 ms or less 100 V AC 28 A max 5 ms or less 200 V AC 24 V DC service power supply 400 mA 1 This item shows values when all 24 V DC service power supplies are used in the maximum configuration connectable to the main unit and includes the input current 5 or 7 mA per point 4 2 2 DC power type tans Specification FX3S 30MCIDO Supply voltage 24V DC Allowable supply voltage range 20 4 to 26 4 V DC Allowable instantaneous power i Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 5 ms or less failure time Power fuse 250V 1 6A Rush current 20 A max 1 ms or less 24 V DC 24 V DC service power supply 2 There power consumption values are maximum values which include consumption of all expansion equipment and input current 5 or 7 mA per point FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 3 Input Specifications 4 3 Input Specifi
7. Abbreviation of FX3S Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3U FX3UC Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition Abbreviation of FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Positioning Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual 18 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Features and Part Names 2 1 Major Features Features and Part Names Major Features 1 Basic functions Up to 30 input output points Main units are available in models of 10 14 20 and 30 total input output points Memory capacity The PLC has a 16 K step EEPROM memory Program capacity is 4 K steps Built in USB port The PLC has a built in USB port for the programming communication function to enable high speed communication at 12 Mbps Built in RUN STOP switch The PLC can be started and stopped with the built in switch RUN and STOP commands can be given to the PLC through a general purpose input terminal or peripheral device Built in Variable analog potentiometers except FX3S 30MLI ELI 2AD The PLC has two built in variable analog potentiome
8. The external dimensions of the main unit are explained 4 6 1 Main units 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MELEG FXss A iS O roe K fe D a N N ro C Y W1 Mounting hole pitches 75 2 96 AC power type 49 1 93 DC power type Series Model name W mm inches R e e a MASS Weight kg Ibs FX3S 10MR ES FX3S 10MT ES Approx 0 30 0 66 Ibs FX3S 10MT ESS FX3S 10ML 60 2 37 52 2 05 FX3S 10MR DS FX3S 10MT DS Approx 0 22 0 48 Ibs FX3S 10MT DSS FX3S 14MR ES FX3S 14MT ES Approx 0 30 0 66 Ibs FX3S 14MT ESS FX3S 14ML 60 2 37 52 2 05 FX3S 14MR DS FX3S 14MT DS Approx 0 22 0 48 Ibs FX3S 14MT DSS FX3S 20MR ES FX3S 20MT ES FX3S 20MT ESS FX3S 20ML 75 2 96 T FX3S 20MR DS FX3S 20MT DS FX3S 20MT DSS 2 i Approx 0 40 0 88 Ibs 67 2 64 Approx 0 30 0 66 Ibs FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD Approx 0 45 0 99 Ibs FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD FX3S 30MLU 100 3 94 92 3 63 FX3S 30MR DS FX3S 30MT DS Approx 0 35 0 77 lbs FX3S 30MT DSS 1 Accessories Dust proof protection sheet Manual supplied with product 2 Installation 35 mm 1 38 wide DIN rail or Direct installation with M4 screws 36 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensio
9. gt U e pe k i oa 1 1 1 Classification of major components in this manual Za 5 1 Main unit Chapter 1 to Chapter 14 Division Tt i Reference This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for obtaining the manuals and 4 Introduction of manuals ean Chapter 1 the abbreviations Y Features and part names This chapter contains explanations of the product features and the names of the parts Chapter 2 8 S Introduction of product eae contains explanations of the structures for model names extension Chapter 3 a n This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for power supply and input Specifications Chapter 4 output performance specifications external dimensions and terminal block layout oe This chapter contains explanation for upgrading of FX3S PLCs and information for the Version information Chapter 5 application of programming tools Qi i i JUs OM D D System configuration Procedure for determining whether or not a system configuration is possible Chapter 6 SD This chapter contains explanations for the panel layout and the procedures for a S x Installation i Chapter 7 2 installing with DIN rail or screws Powersupply wing This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for preparing for wiring power Chapter 8 supply wiring and wiring precautions 6 Input wiring This chapter contains explanations of the input wiring and wiring precautions Chapter 9
10. Asowey ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq 179 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 Memory Cassette 17 3 Installation Fix the memory cassette F in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws E in the right figure to the expansion board or connector conversion adapter e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution e Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3x16 longer screws e Fixation is not necessary when using only the loader function and not always connecting the memory cassette 180 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 4 Removal 17 4 Removal 5 Be sure that the power is OFF when removing the memory cassette J 17 4 1 Removal 12 when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are not used together z Removal procedure Raise the memory cassette detachment lever A in the right figure 13 ss Remove the tapping screws B in the right 5S figure which fix the memory cassette Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws 14 aa 2 Grasp the detachment lever C in the right a8 figure and pull it vertically to remove the ge memory cassette 15 S5 ao SS gz S83 Attach the top cover D in the right figure Asowey ayjessey 00
11. Breaker Main unit transistor output sink Emergency stop ft Se i a a eo ea fp Power supply for load connected to PLC output For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 e represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 116 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 2 Transistor output Source 100 to 240 V AC Breaker Main unit transistor output Source 58 c T 5 gt 5 a Ca Buin yndino ZA 10 buum OO sesp SNOEN wh Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny SOL O Power supply for load connected to PLC output EE l For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board c
12. M8002 FNC 12 ici aki FNC 12 cect System information system No 1 is set at D130 to D134 System information system No 2 is set at M400 to M414 Back light forced OFF Input for forced turning ON Back light forced ON 174 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 Display Screen Protect Function 16 11 Display Screen Protect Function The display screen protect function prevents accidental operation by restricting the display module functions The display screen protect function is enabled when no keyword is registered The display screen protect function s protection level is specified in the system information system signal 1 DO O 3 Refer to Section 16 3 for display module function Refer to Section 16 8 for system information setting 16 11 1 System information display screen protect function 1 System signal 1 System Setting Content Pak Special data register Level Description pO All operator functions are valid no protection Only time display is valid current time cannot be changed D8158 KOO DOO 3 r z z 2 Only device monitor display is valid settings cannot be changed Other values All operator functions are valid no protection 2 System signal 2 System signal 2 is unrelated to this function 16 11 2 Program example screen protect function setting In this program example the disp
13. Q IXJ 1940 a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig a s owog N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS Sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 9 FX3G 8AV BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Trimmer layout gt label N Manual supplied with io product 0 48 Trimmer Layout ns ae 150 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 Connector Conversion Adapter 15 3 Connector Conversion Adapter 15 3 1 FX3s CNV ADP External Dimensions Connector conversion adapter main body e MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs Unit mm inches Accessories Four M3x8 tapping screws ne for installation of adapter Manual supplied with product A O 74 2 92 0 58 Connector conversion adapter board E g 15 4 Interface Module 15 4 1 FX 232AWC H External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs e Accessor
14. Device DO D1 D2 Current value 50 100 150 164 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test Example when data register D 32 bit is monitored w Press the button to increase the device number by 2 Press the button to decrease the device number T by 4 gt Press and hold the or button for 1 second or more to increase or decrease the value at high speed a In the case of the list shown below the screen display is as follows Device Current value 1 2 DO D1 1000000 O D2 D3 1500000 z D4 D5 2000000 mY 10 buum OO sesp SNOEN wh Ja o D S32 NN N gs hele et DEEDAT 15 3 Test mode operation gt S 1 Press the OK button in the monitor mode to change the current value S The current value blinks while it is being changed Changing the current value 2 Use the buttons to change the value as desired Press and hold the or button for 1 second or more to increase or decrease the value at high speed NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig 3 Press the OK button to determine the input At this time the input data is written to the PLC a s Howay Ni y sseN 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq 165 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 Tim
15. For the example of positioning wiring refer to the Positioning Control Edition e The input output numbers are the actual numbers on the program They may differ from the numbers shown on the product terminals e Product input output specifications Check the product input output specifications when using any example of wiring Products for sink output and products for source output are available 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt e The examples of programming applied instructions are given based on the allocation of the input output numbers for wiring For the applied instructions refer to the Programming Manual sj pow penuljucosiq 119 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instruction FNC 72 BIN Instruction FNC 19 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instruction FNC 72 BIN Instruction FNC 19 13 2 1 When DSW instruction FNC 72 is used Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 4 digit digital switch to the data register D100 are given below Example of program M8000 p x010 Yo12 D100 RUN monitor Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA Digital switch of BCD 0 1 A50 V diode is necessary 8 Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES 2 In the case of source wiring 0 1A50V VY VV WV VY VV WV VY VV WV VY VV WV
16. Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 2 3 4 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away fro
17. Qi s3919 jesayd d pue uolsSJ3A wasis uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p i uH s13 UN09 peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 2 Expansion boards B Model name Description FX3G 4EX BD 4 points general purpose input FX3G 2EYT BD 2 points transistor output FX3G 232 BD For RS 232C communication FX3G 422 BD For RS 422 communication FX3G 485 BD For RS 485 communication European type FX3G 485 BD RJ For RS 485 communication RJ45 connector FX3G 8AV BD For 8 ch analog volume FX3G 2AD BD 2 ch voltage current input FX3G 1DA BD 1 ch voltage current output 1 Supported in FX3s PLC Ver 1 10 or later 3 1 3 Connector conversion adapter Model name Description FX3S CNV ADP Special adapter connection conversion adapter 3 1 4 Special adapters D Model name Description FX3U 232ADP MB For RS 232C communication FX3U 485ADP MB For RS 485 communication FX3U ENET ADP For Ethernet communication FX3U 4AD ADP 4 ch voltage current input FX3U 4DA ADP 4 ch voltage current output FX3U 3A ADP 2 ch voltage current input 1 ch voltage current output FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 50 to 250 C FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 100 to 600 C FX3U 4
18. Standard built in port RS 422 or expansion board FX3G 422 BD for RS 422 When the RS 232C RS 422 converter FX 232AWC H is connected Expansion board FX3G 232 BD for RS 232C Special adapter FX3U 232ADP MB for RS 232C 3 In programming tools not supporting 115 2 kbps Communication is executed at 9 600 or 19 200 bps 1 When the currently used programming tool does not support the FX3s PLC use a programming tool which allows selection of the FX3G PLC as the alternative model 5 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter When connecting peripheral equipment programming tool or GOT CPU direct connection by way of the FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD or FX3U 232ADP MB set as follows If the setting is not specified with the status below communication error may occur in the connected peripheral equipment For details refer to the Data Communication Edition Set to KO the special data register D8120 or D8400 for communication format setting Set the communication parameter PLC system 2 of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment to Not set as shown in the window below FX Parameter Memory Capacity PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System 2 Ethernet Port The setting contents are cleared when unchecked eA g When communicate with GX Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board for FX etc Sia he D8120 special register of PLC must be 0 cleared an
19. About the maximum load specifications of the resistance load refer to the specification for each model Refer to Subsection 4 1 1 131 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS Jo buum OO sasp SNOEN O E e nN SE Oo O Q _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q Howay N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs When trouble occurs check the LEDs on the PLC to identify the problem with the PLC 14 5 1 POW LED on flashing off sa PLC Status Remedies Status On Power of the specified voltage Is being correctly The power supply is normal supplied to the power supply terminal One of the following problems may have occurred Check the supply voltage e Power of the specified voltage and current is not After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re Flashing being supplied to the power supply terminal apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If the e External wiring is incorrect problem persists consult your local Mitsubishi Electric e Internal error of PLC representative e If the power is not off check the power supply and the power One of
20. Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h s19 UN0J peeds ubiIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 7 5 3 Connecting method B connection of connector conversion adapter This subsection explains how to connect the connector conversion adapter to the main unit Connection procedure Remove the top cover A in the right figure from the front face of the main unit Connect the connector conversion adapter board to the option connector B in the right figure as shown in the right figure and fix it with M3 tapping screws C in the right figure supplied as accessories of the connector conversion adapter e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Proceed to the step 4 when using the AC power type main unit Proceed to the step 3 when using the DC power type main unit Attach the connector cover provided on the DC power type connector D in the right figure to the AC power type connector E in the right figure Connect the connector conversion adapter main body to the connector F in the follow figure provided on the connector conversion adapter board as shown in the follow figure In the case of AC power type main unit In the case of DC power type main unit 60 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure
21. C251 K1234 e While X011 is turned on the counter is reset when RST 3 instruction is executed D 38 ea e When the current value exceeds the setting YOO2 turns on and 25 when the current value becomes lower than the setting YOO2 ej M8251 turns off Co e Y003 turns on down count or off up count according to the A phase B phase counting direction 4 input input D 2 For C254 5 i ponen e C254 starts counting immediately when the input terminal X006 gas a ee ener RST C254 is turned on while X012 is on The count input terminals are 83S TA eee X000 A phase and X001 B phase a X012 ae C254 DO D1 e C254 is reset by X011 on the sequence and it is reset immediately when X002 is turned on 6 a The setting is D1 DO When the current value exceeds the setting D1 DO Y004 pe operates and when the current value becomes lower than the So M8254 setting Y004 turns off e5 1008 3 e Y005 turns on down count or off up count according to the O B phase External start i ia input input 7 A phase External reset Main unit e A 2 phase encoder generates A phase output and B phase output between which there is a 90 phase 8 difference The high speed counter automatically counts up or down according to the output as shown gF below 23g OS oS A phase__ _ Hin B5 eH I i B phase 9 Up counting Down counting e The down count up count operations of C251 to C255 can be monitored thro
22. Electric wire size Tightening stranded wire solid wire End treatment 0 3 to 0 5 mm e Remove the coating of the stranded wire twist the core AWG 22 to 20 wires and connect the wires directly e Remove the coating from the solid wire and connect the wire Two electric wires 0 3 mm AWG 22 x2 directly 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Bar terminal with insulating sleeve recommended product _ 0 3 to 0 5 mm Al 0 5 8WH Phoenix Contact Bar terminal with AWG 22 to 20 e Caulking tool insulating sleeve Refer to the following outline CRIMPEOX 6 1 Phoenix Contact CRIMPFOX 6T F 2 Phoenix Contact One electric wire drawing of bar terminal 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 3 Treatment of electric wire ends Treat the ends of stranded wires and solid wires without coating or using bar terminals with insulating sleeve Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions e Treatment of stranded wires and solid wires without coating sSieandad wireleolid wits Twist the ends of stranded wires tightly so that loose wires will not stick out 9mm Do not solder plate the electric wire ends 0 36 e Treatment using bar terminal with insulating sleeve It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve Insulating sleev
23. M8u turns ON OFF 7 Down count operation ON Up count operation Analog expansion board Refer to Appendix A 3 for details M8260 to M8269 M 8270 to M 8279 Not used Expansion board Analog special adapter Refer to Appendix A 4 for details M8280 to M8289 Special adapter M 8290 to M 8299 Flag M 8300 to M 8303 M 8304 Zero M 8305 M 8306 Carry M 8307 to M 8311 M 8312 1 M 8313 to M 8328 M 8329 Not used Turns ON when the multiplication or i division result is 0 Not used Turns ON when the division result overflows Not used Real time clock data lost error Not used Instruction execution abnormal end Backed up against power interruption and automatically cleared when M8312 itself is cleared or when the clock data is set again 190 Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 08 Correspond Correspond Number and name Operation and function ing special Number and name Operation and function ing special device device z Positioning RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 a M18330 to M18337 Mea M 4 PLSV instruction FNC157 i M18401 3 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 1 2 8338 Acceleration deceleration operation M 840 Send wait flag O r M 8339 anaes e FNC 87 ch1 DA a M 8340 Y000 Pulse output m
24. When the number of program steps is reduced by deletion of contacts coils and applied instructions the program capacity becomes smaller by as many as the reduced number of steps e Errors cannot be detected in write during RUN even in a circuit which causes errors Errors are detected after the PLC is stopped once and then run again 44 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port Make sure to set the contents described in this section when executing circuit monitor device monitor program reading writing etc in the FX3s PLC using the built in USB programming port and GX Works2 5 3 1 Installation of USB driver It is necessary to install the USB driver to execute USB communication using the built in USB programming port For the USB driver installation method and procedure refer to the following manual Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 5 3 2 Setting in GX Works2 1 Double click the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed 2 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 3 Select USB Transfer Setup Connection1 PC side
25. diode is ee negeoeaty ye nr Cel a a oe Digital switch of BCD 8 Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES 120 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instruction FNC 72 BIN Instruction FNC 19 13 2 2 When BIN instruction FNC 19 is used Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 2 digit digital switch to the data register D102 are given below Bojeuy ul jing Example of program M8000 1 7 19 k2x010 D102 mN 7 mo ek O 5 f Q Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring Jo Bun M s sSN SNOEN aN 358 Se a Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES E 5 S 8 ot _ Qi 2 In the case of source wiring suo do pue sun XZ 1940 a s uoisue a ss OD es gs D Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ESS 17 OZ a D S o D 3 S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq 121 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instruction FNC 52 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instruction FNC 52 This section gives examples of wiring for capturing the ON OFF status of 24 switches to M30 to M37 M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 using MTR instruction FNC 52 Example of program aa C2 o2 meg ee vo oe ain Examp
26. gt Data register DD gt Input X gt Output Y gt Auxiliary relay M gt State S gt Timer T gt Counter C 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS 2 Select the desired device and press the OK button The monitor test screen appears Press the ESC button before pressing the OK button to return to the time display screen sj pow penuljucosiq 157 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test 16 5 3 When Input X Output Y Auxiliary relay M or State S is selected Input X Output Y Auxiliary relay M and State S can be monitored Output Y Auxiliary relay M and State S can be tested also 1 Description of display Display Content 1 2 3 1 Displayed device 2 Displayed device No 3 ON OFF status of device 1 From the displayed device No the ON OFF status of 8 points in the case of X or Y or 10 points in the case of M or S is indicated OFF status ON status Y000 is specified as the device to be displayed only YOOO and Y003 are in the ON status 2 Monitor mode operation Every time the or button is pressed the displayed device number is increased or decreased by 10 and the ON OFF status is displayed for the corresponding devices To return to the device selection screen press ESC button
27. rotation contact x reverse os rotation Reverse PLC output rotation contact 111 u T 5 gt 5 v Q Ce Bun nding EEN 10 Buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny SOL _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q owog I ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 4 Example of external wiring 100 to 240 V AC Breaker Main unit relay output Emergency S a ee he ee ee Power supply for load connected to PLC output Ef For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting Example 1 output point common terminal 1 A to 2 A 4 output points common terminal 5 A to 10 A 2 e represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 112 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring
28. 1 10 or later 2 Executed at END instruction 188 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Correspond Number and name Operation and function ing special device RS instruction FNC 80 and Computer link ch1 M18120 4 RS instruction FNC 80 instruction i S121 Send wait flag RS instruction FNC 80 instruction 1 MEG iaa Send request Dataa P RS instruction FNC 80 instruction 1 H Receive complete flag ORE RS instruction FNC 80 instruction Moles Carrier detection flag i T2 3 M 8126 Computer link ch1 Global ON Computer link ch1 mae On demand send processing Computer link ch1 D8127 Moren On demand error flag D8128 Computer link ch1 pene M 8129 On demand Word Byte changeover RS instruction FNC 80 instruction Time out check flag Positioning PLSY PLSR instruction M 8145 Y000 Pulse output stop command M 8146 Y001 Pulse output stop command Y000 Pulse output monitor i Meee BUSY READY Y001 Pulse output monitor i Mats BUSY READY Inverter communication function Isic M 8151 Inverter communication in execution D8151 ch1 M 8152 2 Inverter communication error ch1 D8152 x Inverter communication error latch M 8153 2 D8153 ch1 M18154 t0 M8150 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or RS instruction is OFF 2 Cle
29. 16 13 Operation Button ON OFF Information Operation button ON OFF information can be monitored at the system information system signal 2 M 4 to M 7 while the PLC is running Refer to Section 16 8 for system information setting 16 13 1 Various applications 1 Operation button function checks The programming tool can be used to monitor the system information s system signal 2 operation button ON OFF information to verify that operation buttons are functioning properly 2 Specified device monitor function device changes Devices handled in the specified device monitor function can be changed by using both the specified device monitor display status and operation button ON OFF information in the system information system signal 2 Refer to Subsection 16 13 1 for the specified device monitor function setting procedure 16 13 2 System information operation button ON OFF information 1 System signal 1 System signal 1 has no system information related to this function 2 System signal 2 Special data register System Information Status Description ESC button is pressed ESC button is not pressed button is pressed Den eOsGa GA button is not pressed ea hae button is pressed button is not pressed ON OK button is pressed AA O O Ooan p OK button is not pressed 16 14 Specifying a Decimal Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format The display format for monitored
30. Additional eas Devices parameters etc provided in structured projects Structured Programming Manual JY997D26001 P i op proj 09R925 6 Manual of GX Works2 Device amp Common On O lt Additional AGP Sequence instructions provided in structured projects of 2 T Structured Programming Manual JY997D34701 q p Pro 09R926 c3 Manual i i GX Works2 g Basic amp Applied Instruction Additional tie Application functions provided in structured projects of Structured Programming Manual JY997D34801 PP J proj 09R927 Manual are GX Works2 Application Functions 7 Manuals for communication control wn E Common a me Details of N N Network parallel link computer link and 5 AENA S S ae mania PP JY997D16901 non protocol communication RS instruction and RS2 09R715 Manual Data Communication Edition instruction FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC 8 Additional Series User s Manual JY997D26201 Details on MODBUS serial communication in FX3S FX3G 09R626 Manual MODBUS Serial Communication FX3GC FX3U FX3UC PLCs Son vas S20 Edition z 38 E Ethernet oe When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied Describes installation and specifications for the FX3U a a FX3U ENET ADP yy997D47401 ENET ADP Ethernet communication special adapter raduci Installation Manual extracted from the FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual 9 P When using refer to FX3U ENET ADP User s Ma
31. Approx 20g 0 05Ibs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board es a Side cover Label for mle indication of link station pee Te number 2 types Manual supplied with product SSS Ts eee p 35 1 38 i 10 12 e Terminal block European type 0 4 0 48 for grounding e Connector RJ45 e Terminal resistance 330 9 110 Q built in Terminal Layout Pin configuration Wiring setting Terminal resistance 1 SG switch setting switch yt 2 Not used fe 3 SDA 2PAIR TOR ___ 4 RDB 1PAIR a 2 poles 5 RDA 6 SDB 8 1 7 Not used 8 Not used 148 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 7 FX3G 2AD BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs f e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 15 2 8 FX3G 1DA BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs f e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 149 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja sgueu zuleN uny SOL O E e 4 nN O r
32. C data registers D index registers Z and V and in controlling the SET RST circuit and self retaining circuit The operation to forcibly turn on timers is effective only when the timers are driven by the program The results of forcible ON OFF operation performed while the PLC in the stopped state or performed for devices not used in the program are retained However the results of the operation performed for the input relays X are not retained because the relays refresh input even while the PLC is in the stopped state They are updated according to the input terminal conditions 2 Since the current values may be changed according to MOV instruction in the program and the operation results the most recently obtained values are retained 3 The current values of the file registers stored in the program memory cannot be monitored or tested on the display module 4 Change of timer and counter settings The settings of the timers T and counters C can be changed only when the timers are driven by the program 14 3 3 Program modification function The sequence program can be transferred while the PLC is running or in the stopped state as shown below v Effective Ineffective EE Item stopped status Batch writing of file registers D ni v Modification of whole program batch writing Le v Writing of parameters to PLC Lee v Writing of comments to PLC Pe bi v Since the writing function is used during running
33. Communication Edition Analog Control Edition Positioning Control Edition ENET ADP User s Manual Description Generic name for FX3S Series PLCs Generic name for FX3G Series PLCs Generic name for FX3U Series PLCs Abbreviation of FX3S Series PLC main units Generic name for the following models FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RuJ FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD Generic name for communication special adapters and analog special adapters Generic name for the following models FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP Generic name for the following models FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Generic name for the following model FX3S 5DM Generic name for the following model FX3G EEPROM 32L Generic name for programming software handy programming panel HPP and indicator Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel HPP Generic name for GX Works2 and GX Developer Abbreviation of programming software package SWLIDNC GXW2 E Abbreviation of programming software package SWLID5C GPPW E Generic name for the following model FX 30P Generic name for the following model FX 232AWC H Abbreviation of FX 485PC IF Generic name for GT16 GT15 GT14 GT11 and GT10 Generic name for GOT A900 Series and GOT F900 Series Generic name for GOT A900 Series Generic name for GOT F900 Series
34. D SUB 9 pin male 13 12 SS 35 1 38 5 2 0 21 0 48 oS cF Pin configuration 1 CD DCD 2 RD RXD 14 terao g SD TXD S53 oMomomee mre 4 ER DTR Sop 0000 5 SG GND 3 6 DR DSR toe 7 Not used i 8 Not used 9 Not used IXJ 1940 15 2 4 FX3G 422 BD External Dimensions a s uoisue Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs Bo i e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws A for installation of board 25 Side cover Manual supplied with product 1 F e Connector RS 422 MINI DIN 8 pin os female 3 3 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS Sj pow penuljuoosiq 147 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 5 FX3G 485 BD External Dimensions MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Label for indication of link station number Manual supplied with product Unit mm inches e Terminal block European type e Terminal resistance 330 0 110 Q built in Terminal Layout Terminal resistance setting switch SG SDB SDA RDB RDA 5 poles 1109 OPEN 330Q 15 2 6 FX3G 485 BD RJ External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight
35. FNC 57 D 8141 Upper and PLSR instruction FNC 59 Accumulated number of D 8142 Lower pulses output to Y001 for PLSY instruction FNC 57 D 8143 Upper and PLSR instruction FNC 59 018744 BIAS 3 Inverter communication function 5 Response wait time of inverter poy communication ch1 Step number of instruction during D 8151 inverter communication ch1 M8151 Default 1 a Error code for inverter 6 D 8152 communication ch1 melas Inverter communication error step D 8153 number latched ch1 M8153 Default 1 D15754 BIE 3 Display module FX3S 5DM function Control device D for display D 8158 module Default 1 Control device M for display D 81597 module Default 1 Advanced function D 8160 to D 8168 D 8169 5 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 6 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 7 Supported in Ver 1 20 or later 8 Details of each access restriction Not used gt Access restriction status Present Access restriction Monitor Present value value status Read Write ing change 4 2nd keyword is not x x x kk 10 VA 9 Y 9 VA 9 VA 9 H4410 Read write y y protection 4 All online operation ak 10 9 Accesses are restricted by the keyword setting status 10 indicates areas used by the system 194 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appen
36. FX3S MR ES FX3S MT ES FX3S MT ESS Where x indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S CNV ADP FX3S MR DS FX3S xMT DS FX3S MT DSS Where x indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD RJ from September 1st 2014 FX3S 5DM Standard Remark EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirements and tests EMI e Radiated Emission e Conducted Emission EMS e Radiated electromagnetic field e Fast transient burst e Electrostatic discharge e High energy surge e Voltage drops and interruptions e Conducted RF e Power frequency magnetic field Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Low Voltage 2006 95 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3s series manufactured from March 1st 2013 from September 1st 2013 Standard FX3S MR ES FX3S MT ES FX3S xMT ESS Where x indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S MR DS Where indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD Remark EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as
37. However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 98 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 1 Outline 11 1 Outline This section explains handling of the built in variable analog potentiometer and built in analog input For the built in variable analog potentiometer function refer to Section 11 2 For the built in analog input function refer to Section 11 3 11 2 Built in variable analog potentiometer function 11 2 1 Outline of functions The main unit has two built in variable analog potentiometers function shown in the figure below The value increases from 0 to 255 when the variable analog potentiometer is turned clockwise and
38. Installation Manual a l product communication and analog special adapters E Display module Supplied with FX3S 5DM JY997D51601 Procedures for mounting and handling the display i Installation Manual module product E Memory cassette eos FX3G EEPROM 32L Specifications and operating procedures of the memory with i JY997D32401 product Installation Manual cassette 17 uononpou N S WEN Hed pue soinjeo4 Oo uononpou Np suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p 2EY usiH sJ9 uno9 peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 Introduction 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Abbreviation generic name ad MOSS FX3S Series FX3G Series FX3U Series FX3S PLCs or main units Expansion boards Special adapters Communication special adapters Analog special adapters Display module Memory cassettes Peripheral devices Programming tool Programming software GX Works2 GX Developer Handy programming panels HPP RS 232C RS 422 converters RS 232C RS 485 converters Indicators GOT1000 Series GOT 900 Series GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series Manuals FX3S Hardware Edition Programming manual Data Communication Edition MODBUS Serial
39. Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 3 If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 2 4 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 64 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User
40. O Failure to do so may cause electric shock E WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product S Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or co thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 P Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly aN Please wire using the correct polarity SEF Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual oZy If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out oF 2 Do not wire vacant terminals externally E Doing so may damage the product au When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit
41. Remove the display module as shown in the right figure arrow 4 154 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 Summary of Functions 16 3 Summary of Functions 5 i i gt The display module functions are summarized below D The function to control the display module from programs are called 5DM control functions amp Operator functions O Input X output Y auxiliary relay M state S counter C ee timer T and data register D monitor test function punonepetation secon IG Time display and setting Display and setting of the current time Button operation Section 16 6 5DM control functions Specified device monitor function Specifies devices displayed on the display module from the PLC Requires program Section 16 9 1 3 Back light off function Sets automatic backlight OFF time Requires program Section 16 10 BPE r lt s Display screen protect function Allows restriction of the operator functions regarding display and Requires program Section 16 11 setting ace a ej Error display valid invalid ove me eciection Nee emar AISHAT ope ialon Gror Requires program Section 16 12 D etc is valid or invalid n Radd z a ome Allows monitoring of operation button ON OFF status Section 16 13 wh Ja Decimal hexadecimal current Allows the display format for monitored values to switch between i Get rar th
42. TA Write the same device as MAA used for edit request sj pow penuljucosiq 173 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 10 Back light off function 16 10 Back light off function Use this function to turn OFF the backlight after the specified time The initial value is 10 minutes The backlight will turn OFF 10 minutes later if the backlight off time is not set Once the backlight turns OFF it will turn ON again when any button is pressed This button will act as a trigger not an effective button The contents displayed before the backlight OFF will be shown 16 10 1 System Information Back light off function 1 System signal 1 Special data register System Information Description D8158 KO UO DOO 2 Back light off time minute Operation of DO O 2 Back light off time can be set in the following range 0 10 minutes 1 to 240 1 to 240 minutes 240 or more 240 minutes Negative value Forced OFF Caution Setting a Negative value in DO O 2 will force the backlight OFF setting MA A 2 the backlight can be forced ON 2 System signal 2 Special data register System Information Description _ Disable automatic backlight OFF Forced ON H i ON Disable OFF Enable 3 Program example In this program example the backlight forced turning ON OFF is set System information is assigned from D130 to D134 and from M400 to M414
43. lt J O N _ lt O wasis uoneinByuo4y 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less uoneleysu A Q PUS o oes oe O O Ge eet lt ox Bui induy SJ9 UN0D peeds ubiIH 85 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 1 Outline 10 Use of High speed Counters 10 1 Outline High speed counters use input terminals X000 to X007 of the main unit for inputs and offer counting up to 60 kHz 1 phase Input terminals not used for high speed counters are available for general purpose inputs For the input specifications refer to Section 4 3 10 2 Types of Counting and Operations The main unit has built in 32 bit high speed bi directional counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input For some high speed counters external reset input terminals or external start input terminals start of counting can be selected 10 2 1 Types and input signal forms The types and input signals waveforms of high speed counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input are shown below High speed Input signal form Counting direction counter type Down count or up count is specified by turning on or off 1 phase 1 count M8235 to M8245 input uPDown_ f Lf Lf Lt Le ON Down counting OFF Up counting Up count or down count The cou
44. make sure to read the input wiring described later Refer to Chapter 9 7 e Indication of output terminals connected to common terminal P One common terminal covers 1 or 4 output points D The output numbers Y connected to a common terminal are enclosed with heavy partition lines gt For transistor output source type COMU is V 8 ZS S39 3S 9 10 Ss 37 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout FX3s 10ML 4 7 2 e AC power type u KE O N GP gt lt LL ol L ow O N 69 gt lt LL FX3S 10MT ESS DC power type ep KE H 9 X lt LL u z Z H 9 x LL FX3S 10MT DSS FX3s 14ML 4 7 3 e AC power type o W H Jv N c gt lt LL Op Ww ma wv N c gt L LL N gt 2 s S JEK gt io 1 gt g lt x lt N LL DC power type ep H GP X lt LL oO te wv H GP X lt LL FX3S 14MT DSS 38 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout w Introduction aD a z aD Oo 8 a g O oo lt lt LL 4 7 4 CG Features and Part Names o L kK D N 32 gt lt fa ol U
45. the programming tool must support the write during RUN function such as GX Worksz2 For the writing function during running refer to Subsection 5 2 5 130 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection This PLC does not incorporate consumable parts that are factors in the reduction of service life However the output relays points of contact have a limited life expectancy 14 4 1 Periodic inspection Check the following points e Check that the temperature in the panel is not abnormally increased by other heat generating bodies or direct sunlight e Check that dust or conductive dust has not entered the panel e Check for loosening of wiring and other abnormalities 14 4 2 Maintenance product life of relay contacts The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life 1 Inductive load Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown which may cause arcing At a fixed current consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller the arc energy gets
46. to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions e Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure Use the product within the generic environment specification
47. 148 1527 FXG ZA DH BD crnina a a a aia a e 149 WO FA G IDA BD eta a a tea aia paseneeannaaiee 149 EAFA SG SAV BD aana aE E A AA 150 15 3 Connector Conversion ACaptel cccccccccsseeccesceceeeeecesceseaeccacecsueeesegeessueeesasessuseesaueessugeeees 151 ges rt Dam car OS OCN ADP aaa a a eS Re oe 151 TOA inte aC Sr Modde itch races heat tt coats N ceanatence cone dt vaut cag tecieies 0 eameeieccotnseocsatsid ued taasancecast 151 oA PEZZA WG Faaa rectus daa aoa E T ut ate ane aa Aca eaten canatenEA 151 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM 152 16 1 SSC ING AM OMS oily adiser cpsneey each Moar a a E Saneduinases 152 16 11 10 0 9 PLC eee nin nro arn nO cae a ne eee ee ne 152 1 631222 Display S DECINCATIONS anccda fe ceae sd satct tale decent ices are date a a e aS 152 16 1 3 External Dimensions and Part NamesS cccccccceccceceseeeceeeeececeeeeeeeteeeeaeecegecseeeauetseeaeeeneeeses 153 16 2 instalatonand Removal aarun a oan neat T E O aa 153 16 2 1 Installation and Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together 008 153 16 2 2 Installation and Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 001n0001100015 154 16 3 SUMIMALy Of FUNCHONS anios aa E EEE Eti 155 16 4 Flowing or the Screen DISplay aieri a a e ee ee 156 NG MONIO TES Erce saccade E A E A A E A 157 TOS REE VAIL CCV ICC Saa a a a dane ui nad aa tel antacadl
48. 2 Displayed while timer T is ON 3 Displayed while timer T is reset 2 Monitor mode operation Press the or buttons to change the device to monitor Timer T that is not used in the program is not displayed To return to the device selection screen press ESC button A horizontal line is displayed if there is no timer T in the program Example when TO and T10 are used in the program Example when Timer T is not used in the program 160 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test 3 Test mode operation w 1 Press the OK button once in the monitor mode to change the current l 5 value Changing the current value a Press the OK button twice in the monitor mode to change the set amp value 4 2 2 s 2 Use the buttons to change the value as desired E Press and hold the or button for 1 second or more to increase or decrease the value at high speed 2a 3 Press the OK button to determine the input At this time the input data is written to the PLC Ja Case of resetting the current value When the OK button is pressed and held for 2 seconds or more while the Ee EUEN yale 353 current value is being changed the current value is reset to 0 and the Sgp character R and current value 0 start to blink 33 j Press the OK button while R and the current value are blinking
49. 2 1 Major Features 3 Display functions display module Supported in Ver 1 20 or later FX3S 5DM Display Module option can be installed on the PLC Monitor test function Devices can be monitored and tested by operating the buttons on the display module The button operations can be inhibited by the user program Other functions On the display module you can set the time and display error codes Refer to Chapter 16 Communication and network functions The expansion board and special adapter for each communication function can be connected Refer to Data Communication Edition Refer to MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Refer to ENET ADP User s Manual Kinds of communication functions e Programming communication RS 232C RS 422 USB e N N Network e Parallel link e Computer link e Inverter communication e Non protocol communication RS 232C RS 485 e MODBUS communication e Ethernet 5 Analog functions The expansion board and special adapter for each analog function are connected Refer to Analog Control Edition Kinds of analog functions e Voltage current input e Voltage current output e Temperature sensor input thermocouple and platinum resistance thermometer sensor 20 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 5 mr
50. 3 Introduction of Products 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names The following system configuration is classified into product groups A to F in the product introduction sections given below B Expansion boards Display module Memory cassette Output FX3s 5DM I FX36 EEPROM 32L e FX3G 4EX BD e FX3G 2EYT BD Communication Analog e FX3G 232 BD e FX3G 2AD BD e FX3G 422 BD e FX3G 1DA BD e FX3G 485 BD Analog volume e FX3G 485 BD RJ e FX3G 8AV BD B Special adapters Connector conversion adapter A Ne input output e FX3U 4AD ADP e FX3S 10MR ES e FX38 1 0MT ES S e FX3U 4DA ADP e FX3S 14MR ES e FX3S 14MT ES S e FX3U 3A ADP e FX3S 20MR ES e FX3S 20MT ES S e FX3U 4AD PT ADP e FX3S 30MR ES e FX3S 30MT ES S e FX3U 4AD PTW ADP e FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES S 2AD e FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3S 10MR DS e FX3S 10MT DS S e FX3S 14MR DS e FX3S 14MT DS S e FX3S 20MR DS e FX3S 20MT DS S e FX3U 232ADP MB e FX3S 30MR DS e FX3S 30MT DS S e FX3U 485ADP MB e FX3U ENET ADP 24 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 1 Main units The main unit incorporates a CPU memory input and output terminals and power supply To establish a system at least one
51. 5 ms Latch memory all E M 8012 ON and OFF in 100 ms cycle i clear However file registers D in 100 ms clock pulse ON 50 ms OFF 50 ms program memory M 8013 ON and OFF in 1 sec cycle i M 8033 When PLC is switched from RUN to 1 sec clock pulse ON 500 ms OFF 500 ms Memory hold STOP sai pi A and data j SY M 8014 ON and OFF in 1 min cycle i y So 1 min clock pulse ON 30 sec OFF 30 sec M 80342 All external output contacts of PLC f J J SE Clock stop and preset All outputs disable are turned OFF Se For real time clock M 8035 PB Forced RUN mode Time read display is stopped M 8016 M 8036 B For real time clock Forced RUN signal Refer to Programming Manual for M 8017 30 seconds correction f g details A For real time clock M 8037 i Forced STOP mos aeaa wave ON Sra l M 8038 Communication parameter setting D8176 to 4 M 8019 Real time clock RTC error i Parameter setting flag for N N network setting D8180 ae M 8039 When M8039 is ON PLC waits until C Constant scan scan time specified in D8039 and D8039 o mode then executes cyclic operation QB oO 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP ee 2 Executed at END instruction D 187 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Correspond Correspond Number and name Operation and function ing special Num
52. 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Application of labels 7 6 3 Application of trimmer layout Label FX3G 8AV BD UOI ONPO U The trimmer layout label is packed together with the FX3G 8AV BD Adhere it in a position where it can be seen easily for quick reference as shown in the figure below FX3G 8AV BD VOLUME LABEL Y818D63201A NO FX3G 8AV BD SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suojeoyioeds Aa Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis O O zh Q S jad O UONe e SUI O0 Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H 63 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits
53. EMO operation Contents of error Action 1 2 code at error occurrence 2 xe PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 2 When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly 6101 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used 1 3 Stops something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult 2 operation ich ss your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Check user program T S ue matendeg timer SEGE The scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000 5 wn PLC PP communication error M8062 D8062 6201 Parity overrun or framing error 6202 Communication character error Check the cable connection between the programming panel B S eS i 6203 Communication data sum check error PP programming device and the PLC This error may occur Sgp when a cable is disconnected and reconnected during PLC ODS 6204 Data format error monitoring 25 ar Q operation 6230 When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Ln Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO Serial communication error 1 M8063 D8063 a s uoisue 0302 vi 6304 Ethernet communication Inverter communication Le computer link and programming 6305 Ensure that the parameters ar
54. Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 2 Sides AC Power Type a S Q Q Q r O SOWeN Hed pue soinjeo4 OO DC power type e Left side S 2 Zo Q r 09 O 8 1 Connector conversion adapter These holes are designed to secure the connector conversion adapter with screws 9 connecting screw holes 2 places 2 Analog input terminal block Two analog inputs are built in only FX3S 30MLJ EL 2AD These terminals are for wiring the analog inputs 5 3 Label of authenticity The label of authenticity is affixed to the right side of the product and indicates that the product is genuine D oS Product without the label or nameplate is not covered by the warranty ous S N D 4 Nameplate The product model name serial number and power supply specifications are shown g 2 For details on the manufacturer s serial number a refer to Subsection 5 1 1 5 DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 6 Ow S D es z A v D S F 2s oO O o lt Bum ndu QO pue uonevedaiy CO i uH s13 UN09 peeds 23 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names
55. Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 1 FX3G 4EX BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05Ibs 7 e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board N Side cover N Manual supplied with product e Connector European type V 35 1 38 Terminal Layout LEDs correspond to each input terminal C B CJ CJ LI CL DIST BXO BX1 BX2 BX3 Y 00 00 00 a0 Ld 5 poles 15 2 2 FX3G 2EYT BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20g 0 05Ibs j e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws Pi for installation of board A Side cover Manual supplied with product e Connector European type J V Q 15 1_ 14 1 0 6 jt Terminal Layout LEDs correspond to each output terminal S O BYO By n an a Ld 5 poles 146 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Expansion Board 15 2 3 FX3G 232 BD z External Dimensions 2 Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 20 g 0 05 Ibs A f e Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws 1 2 for installation of board O Side cover Ss n Manual supplied with z xa product a e Connector RS 232C
56. Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type This section explains handling of transistor output external wiring precautions and example of external wiring For the transistor output specifications refer to Subsection 4 4 2 12 2 1 Transistor Output Sink and Source There is a product of a sink output and source output in the transistor output of the main units e Sink output common Output to make load current flow into the output Y terminal is called sink output e Source output common Output to make load current flow out of the output Y terminal is called source output supply 12 2 2 Handling of transistor output 1 Output terminals One common terminal is used for 1 or 4 transistor output points Sink output Connect each COMU number terminal to the minus side of the load power supply The COMU terminals are not connected internally Sink output type Main unit Source output Connect each V number terminal to the plus side of the load power supply The VLJ terminals are not connected internally Source output tvoe Fuse DC power supply DC power Fuse l supply 113 sy c z 5 gt 5 D a Ca Bun nding ZA Jo buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny SOL _ Qi suo do pue sun X
57. Required condition The PLC must be stopped Install the memory cassette on the main unit Setting the PROTECT switch to ON on memory cassette s rear face prevents accidental overwriting of memory cassette program Refer to Section 17 3 for the installation procedure e Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC e Turn the PLC power ON e Raise the memory cassette s eject lever n iia 32L gt PLC Press the WRI key 1 time WR LED gt o j y WR key lt a 32L lt PLC 2 The WR LED lights and a preparation status is established OFF ON O PROTECT SW ll I I e To cancel press the RD key Press the WR key again Writing is executed and the WR LED blinks e It takes several seconds to write data to the built in EEPROM The WR LED flickers while data is written Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Writing is completed when the WR LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cassette from the PLC Refer to Section 17 4 for the removal procedure 185 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny SOL _ Qi suodo pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue TO DO ND on Ss S83 D Asowey ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU g
58. Rp of 15 kQ or more If the resistance is less than 15 kQ connect a bleeder resistance Rb KQ obtained by the following formula as shown in the following figure 4Rp UOI ONPO U NO Rb kQ lt 15 Rp SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Bleeder Bleeder resistance resistance TRb TRb 3 PEC ee PLC eee u Sink input Source input 38 5 or more or more g 4 In the case of 2 wire proximity switch 8 Q Use a two wire proximity switch whose leakage current 14 is 1 5 mA or less when the switch is off 3 When the current is larger than 1 5 mA connect a bleeder resistance Rb KQ determined by the following formula Qi _6 10 1 5 Rb kQ lt S8DINOQ jesouduad pue UOISJ3 Bleeder resistance Bleeder resistance Rb Two wire proximity sensor Rb Two wire proximity sensor PEC Sink input wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu i oo Q Fp o 2 D oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox Bui induy SJ9 UN0D peeds ubiH 79 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 9 2 3 Examples of external wiring AC power type 1 Sink input I 2 Bor 4 Main unit Main unit es ee es ee ee 3 Three wire sensor Input impedance Three wire sensor Two wire pro
59. T iq O 3 Q r O 5 je Q O e 95 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 10 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 10 9 1 Related devices 1 For switching 1 phase 1 count input counter mode to up count or down count High speed counter type High speed counter No Down counting C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 1 phase 1 count input C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C245 Specifying device M8235 M8236 M8237 M8238 M8239 M8240 OFF ON M8241 M8242 M8243 M8244 M8245 2 For monitoring of up count down count counting direction of 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input counters Up counting Down counting 3 For switching high speed counter function Device No p Name Description Reference M8388 sa fom Changing Mgh spsed gounter Changes the function of high speed counter M8392 Function switching devices Switches the function of C248 and C253 Subsection 10 9 2 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 10 Cautions on Use 10 9 2 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals When the counters C248 and C253 are combined with the auxiliary relays M8388 the allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed Program the special auxil
60. User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 4 Analog input terminal block If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be The analog inputs use a European terminal block Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable ends as shown below Wire size Wire size No of wire per terminal Solidwire Stranded wire Ferrules with plastic sleeve 1 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 0 14 to 1 0 mm AWG26 to 16 0 25 to 0 5 mm AWG24 to 20 2 0 14 to 0 5 mm AWG26 to 20 0 14 to 0 2 mm AWG26 to 24 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable e Stranded wire solid wire Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude Do not solder plate the end of the cable aa Approx 5 mm 0 19 e To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the Insulation sleeve Contact area insulation sleeve For this reason sel
61. be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g
62. bits 70 to Z7 16 points For branching of JUMP and PO to P255 256 points For CJ instructions and CALL CALL instructions pointe Input interruption lOLIL to ISOL 6 points Timer interruption l6LIL to IBUI 3 points Nesting For master control NO to N7 For MC instructions 16 bits 32 768 to 32 767 Decimal number K 32 bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO Can be set as file registers in units of Max 2000 points 500 points from D1000 in the program area EEPROM using parameters ONpod 5 2 O r suo1 e91 0 d9 Qi 16 bits 0 to FFFF OUSs Constant Hexadecimal number H S24 32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF BSS 128 126 126 128 Oe Reapers 32 bits 1 0 x 21 to 1 0 x 27 0 1 0x 2 to 1 0x2 a Decimal point and exponential notations are possible 1 The current time of the clock is backed up by the capacitor built in the PLC Supply the power to the 6 PLC for 30 minutes or more to completely charge this large capacity capacitor The capacitor works for 10 days atmosphere 25 C SL D gt es 3i z v 2 S o FE QSD OS 38 2 5 z a i uH sJa uno9 peeds 35 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation
63. buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi OOO 225 on D 5 a L m az D 5 n O 5 NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig a s Howay Ni y sseN 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 Specified Device Monitor Function 16 8 2 System information setting program example The following is a program example in which the system information has been assigned to D130 to D134 and M400 to M414 System information system No 1 ile FNC 12 130 D8158 MOV is set at D130 to D134 E ae K400 D8159 l System information system No 2 is set at M400 to M414 16 9 Specified Device Monitor Function The specified device monitor function can change the top screen to the monitor test screen for a device specified by the user For the specified device monitor function specify the device type to be displayed in DO O of the system information system signal 1 and specify the device number to be displayed in DO O 1 of the system information system signal 1 It is necessary to turn ON MA A to enable the test operation on the specified device monitor screen 16 9 1 System information specified device monitor function 1 System signal 1 Special data register System Information Description poo Device
64. cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure Reference Reference GHEE S2fety Precautions ED Read these precautions before use 2 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS WARNING ia e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 51 Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual If the screws are tightened outside of the specified
65. devices and power equipment e To prevent temperature rise do not install the PLC on a floor a ceiling or a vertical surface Install it horizontally on a wall as shown in Subsection 7 1 1 7 1 1 Installation location in enclosure 7 1 2 Space in enclosure Special adapter can be connected on the left sides of the main unit If you intend to add special adapter in the future keep necessary spaces on the left sides FX3S Series main unit FX3U 4AD ADP FX3S CNV ADP EN 50 mm 1 97 53 UONonNpouj N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou yOnNpold suojeoyioeds Aa Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD O O zh Q jad O UONe e SUI Bui Aj ddns Jemod Bum induy O pue uonesedaig CO h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 2 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure 7 2 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure Examine the installation location of PLC in consideration of the environmental conditions generic specifications The PLC can be installed by the following two methods 1 Installing on DIN rail e The PLC can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide e The PLC can be easily moved and removed e The PLC is installed higher by the height of the DIN rail For details on the procedures on mounting and removing the DIN rail
66. digit 7 segment 5 display Example of program RUN SEGL monitor Jo Budi sesp SNOEN Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring aN 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES Bunoousejqnou SOUCUBIUIe uny SOL la ee ee e no OW a s uoisue Transistor output sink jo ja 10 circuit suondo pue sun XZ 1940 NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q 2 In the case of source wiring 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output 1 7 Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ESS i pS E E I a Transistor output Source 006 Yoo7 Yo10 Yo11 Y012 Yo13 Yo14 Yo15 10 i j2 ja S I 2D I S I all I a S P 1 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS Sj pow penuljucosiq 123 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instruction FNC 74 BCD Instruction FNC 18 13 4 2 When BCD instruction FNC 18 is used This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 2 digit 7 segment display Example of program M8000 p D100 K2Y006 RUN monitor Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring 7 segment display to be used for s
67. failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 2 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case CAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may
68. fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product _ Qi suondo pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual T a Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual SS Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires dns i Ss Do not solder plate the electric wire ends e Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the te
69. following standards Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user manufacturer For more details please contact to the local Mitsubishi Electric sales site Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004 108 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Attention e This product is designed for use in industrial applications Note e Authorized Representative in the European Community Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Gothaer Str 8 40880 Ratingen Germany FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3s series FX3G series FX3U series manufactured from June 1st 2005 from April 1st 2007 from December 1st 2007 from November 1st 2008 from June 1st 2009 from February 1st 2012 from March 1st 2013 from September 1st 2013 FX3U 232ADP FX3U 485ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G EEPROM 32L FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD FX3U 3A ADP FX3U ENET ADP
70. functions instructions is used the overall frequency is restricted without regard to the operand of the instruction Consider this restriction when examining the system or creating programs and observe the specified overall frequency range e When two or more high speed counters are used e When the HSCS instruction HSCR instruction HSZ instruction PLSY instruction PLSR instruction DSZR instruction ZRN instruction PLSV instruction DRVI instruction or DRVA instruction is used NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction OO High speed counter type Response When HSCS instruction HSCR When HSCS instruction HSCR frequency instruction or HSZ instruction instruction or HSZ instruction F is not used is used a 2 O 1 phase C235 C236 C241 60 kHz 1 count C237 C238 C239 C240 40 kHz input C242 C243 C244 C245 l o C246 OOA 200 kHz 60 kHz 4 coun r input a o SEARRE 10 kHz Number of positioned axes x 40 kHz Number of positioned axes x 5 kHz g 2 phase C251 30 kHz i n 2 count C252 C253 C253 OP 5 kHz input C254 C255 1 Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions PLSY FNC 57 PLSR FNC 59 DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 DRVI Qi FNC158 DRVA FNC159 TA 859 2 Calculation of overall frequency TE Obtain the overall frequency using the following expression Overall frequency gt Sum of used frequency o
71. ginpoy Aejdsig a s Howay Ni y sseN 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 Specified Device Monitor Function 16 9 3 Program example2 when monitoring consecutive timers using operation button In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to timer T The operation buttons and in the display module are available to scroll device numbers TO to T10 during monitoring System information is assigned from D130 to D134 and from M400 to M414 a Timers TO to T10 are used in the program Sy TO to T10 are monitored 9 lt 12 130 MOV parse a a oa Sets the device type to Timer Resets the device number D131 ue tg to When the button is pressed M406 ie ENC 24 storing the system information turns ON beh The INC instruction i INC e instruction increases the current value of D131 by 1 M405 M406 When the button is pressed M405 T FNC 25 D131 storing the system information turns ON DEC The DEC instruction decreases the current value of D131 by 1 FNC224 FNC 12 FNC224 7 FNC 12 1 If device numbers are not consecutive refer to program example 3 on the next page 2 When anon keep type data register is used for D8158 the current value of the data register becomes 0 when
72. in the same way as FX3s PLCs 76 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 9 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type This section explains handling of 24 V DC inputs in the main unit precautions on input device connection and external wiring examples For the input specifications refer to Section 4 3 For specifications and wiring examples of the built in analog inputs refer to Chapter 11 9 2 1 Handling of 24 V DC input 1 Input terminals Sink input When a no voltage contact or NPN open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the OV terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the input display LED lights Source input When a no voltage contact or PNP open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the 24V terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the input display LED lights Input impedance RUN terminal setting X000 to X017 up to the largest input number in the main unit of the main unit can be used as RUN input terminals by setting parameters 1 X000 to X005 in the FX3s 10MLJ main unit X000 to X007 in the FX3s 14ML1 main unit and X000 to X013 in the FX3S 20MLJ main unit For the functions of the RUN terminals refer to Subsection 14 2 1 2 Input circui
73. ma a N m gt lt fa C9 Product Introduction FX3S 20MT ESS DC power type Specifications ep Q O oh N GP gt lt fa FX3S 20MR DS LQ Version and Peripheral Devices FX3S 20MT DSS CO System Configuration aD Q dlS aD oO 2 oO o MO Oo op lt x lt Lh To wv An analog input terminal is Na Installation built into FX3S 30ML1 EO 2AD a lt D D H ot v ap gt lt LL Q lt D D x FT 09 69 gt lt LL OO Preparationand Input Wiring Power Supply Wiring op Q S a 90 gt lt in Op Q ad S ah N 90 gt lt if FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD DC power type High Speed q Counters FX3S 30MT DSS 39 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 1 Version Information 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 5 1 Version Information 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial number check method The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and LOT indicated on the front of the product 1 Checking the name plate The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number S N indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example n
74. main unit is necessary FX3S C C M Incorporating power supply CPU memory input output Series name p ower supply Input output type Connection terminal block e R ES 2AD AC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Relay output Total number of Main unit e T ES 2AD AC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Transistor sink output input and output points e T ESS 2AD AC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Transistor Source output e R DS DC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Relay output e T DS DC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Transistor sink output e T DSS DC power supply 24 V DC sink source input Transistor source output Number of input output points Total Number of Number of Input type Output type Connection Model name number of form points AC power supply common to 24 V DC sink and source va FX3S 14MT ESS a 24 V DC rs Transistor i Terminal block FX3S 30MR ES 2AD 24 V DC Ceana Terminal block FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD E N 24 V DC sink source Terminal block DC power supply common to 24 V DC sink and source input FX3S 10MR DS pF 10 6e f 4 24 V DC sink source Terminal block FX3S 10MT DS p10 ff 24 V DC EA Terminal block FX3S 14MR DS a 24 V DC ainkizoures Terminal block FX3S 30MT DSS EDE ST E 24 V DC sink source Terminal block anfi 25 uononpou N U TI a D a Z oO oO 30 D w nD 2 ONpod uononpou suonesyoods Aa
75. noise 1 Do not bundle the power line or shield of the analog input output cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line 2 Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The di
76. parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion 207 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Revised History Revised History Date Description 5 2013 A First Edition 9 2013 e The following products are added Main unit of the built in analog input FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD Main unit of DC power supply type FX3S 10MR DS FX3S 14MR DS FX3S 20MR DS FX3S 30MR DS FX3S 10MT DS FX3S 14MT DS FX3S 20MT DS FX3S 30MT DS FX3S 10MT DSS FX3S 14MT DSS FX3S 20MT DSS FX3S 30MT DSS Expansion board FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD RJ e Ver 1 10 is supported Supports FX3G 4EX BD Supports FX3G 2EYT BD e Errors are corrected 10 2014 C e The following products are added Display module FX3S 5DM e Ver 1 20 is supported Supports the display module function Special data register of display module is added Appendix A e Errors are corrected 4 2015 e A part of the cover design is changed FX3S SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER S MANUAL Hardware Edition MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN 09R535 JY997D48601D Effective April 2015 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
77. s Manual Hardware Edition uononpou WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO Doing so may cause damage to the product a3 Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or Se thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 5 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly 4 Please wire using the correct polarity a Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual 8 If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant te
78. s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any connection cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards special adapters and memory cassette DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device 6 TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifications Section 4 1 using dedicated packaging boxes and shock absorbing palettes Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation verify operation of the product and check for damage of the mounting part etc FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Manual revision DO 4 2015 Foreword This manual contains text diagrams a
79. teSt cccccccesseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeaeeees 30 A 2 Power Supp SUC CINC ANIONS sonia a e e ee et gemea ae eecaa 30 4 2 TAC POWE NY DC iae a Sencha ald iliac asie baud e tela tebe hw deat ted a cniiaeeciece 30 422 COW CRY OC aia a aa ey Pn er Se et ies oe sl oe 30 AS IMOUL SOG Cin CANOINS sacass ckancuectetaness alae Ohe shaman atm s ak E O 31 4 3 1 24 V DC lnput sink source asec cst senee del aeade tinea Pee s Geetars Judi adie Mul a tee ee ates cecedta nade 31 4 4 Output Specifications 20 0 cece ccccsecceceeeceeeeeeceeceeeeeceseeeeeseeeeseeeeeseecesseeeeseueesseeeeseeesseeeessaesesseeesees 32 4 4 1 Relay output specifications S sixes cece tn tees anes eerste e E E 32 4 4 2 Transistor output SPECIFICATIONS cece ceeccccceeececeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeseeeeseueeessueeeeseeeeesasseeesaneees 33 4 5 Pertormantce SPCCIICAONS srein vessvanciseaneunasesadiacdnas toe penndeened aude a caakmausene a 34 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation ccccceccceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaees 36 AOE MAUN ees Soe eee eee cee es cs E e neste eee olin ES 36 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents A Wena ONL 225c2 82 2eig ccueanatacanauntcnade a a saan sane nnaeeee Tene ane seeeeeae eae 37 4 7 1 Interpretation of terminal block layOut cccccececcccesseeeceeeecececeueececseuseeeessaeeeesseusesessaseeseeesssag
80. the PLC is stopped As a result the device type displayed as DOO becomes invalid and the operator functions become valid Use a keep type data register as shown above for making invalid the operator functions 3 When a keep type auxiliary relay is used for D8159 initialize it using the FNC 40 ZRST instruction etc System information system No 1 Boe is set at D130 to D134 The device number display range is set to from TO to T10 170 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 Specified Device Monitor Function 16 9 4 Program example3 when monitoring non consecutive timers using operation D buttons In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to amp timer T The operation buttons and in the display module are available to scroll device numbers T1 T5 T10 and T20 during monitoring 1 2 System information is assigned from D130 to D134 and from M400 to M414 S K100 g GD K150 a T5 Timers having nonconsecutive K200 device numbers are used as 1 3 Ti shown in this program lt lt by Tao ca Ee MONNA FNC 12 System information system No 1 4 4 MOV BobOU I GIS is set at D130 to D134 S52 FNC 12 System information system No 2 SFD eee Aea is set at M400 to M414 B35 E FNC 12 K5 D130 Sets the device type to Timer MOV 1 5 959 RST Resets th
81. the end of the stranded cable so that loose wires will not stick out Do not solder plate the end of the cable Approx 8 mm 0 31 3 Tightening torque Set the tightening torque to 0 4 to 0 5 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Caution When tightening a grounding terminal use a screwdriver suitable for the terminal screw The screwdriver which does not suit the thread groove is used tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the above use the following screwdriver or an appropriate replacement lt Reference gt Weidmuller Interface GmbH amp Co KG SDIK PHO 9008560000 Weidmuller Interface GmbH amp Co KG SD 0 6x3 5x100 9008330000 70 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Grounding 8 3 Grounding UOI ONPO U Ground the PLC as stated below e Perform class D grounding Grounding resistance 100 Q or less e Ground the PLC independently if possible If it cannot be grounded independently ground it jointly as shown below Other Q N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed ONpold Extension devices of PLC except expansion board and s
82. the following problems may have occurred supply route The power supply is off e f power is being supplied correctly consult your local Mitsubishi External wiring is incorrect Electric representative Power of the specified voltage is not being After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re supplied to the power supply terminal apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If the The power cable is broken problem persists consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 14 5 2 ERR LED on flashing off sale PLC Status Action Status 1 Stop the PLC and re apply power If ERR LED goes off a watchdog timer error may have occurred Take any of the following measures Review the program The maximum value D8012 of the scan time should not exceed the setting D8000 of the watchdog timer Check that the input used for input interruption or pulse catch is not being abnormally turned on and off in one scan Check that the frequency of the pulse duty of 50 input to the high speed counter does not exceed the specified range Add the WDT instructions A watchdog timer error may have occurred Add some WDT instructions to the program and reset the watchdog On or the hardware of the PLC may be timer several times in one scan damaged Change the setting of the watchdog timer Change the watchdog timer setting D8000 in the program so that the setting is larger than the maximum value of
83. to write EJ the current value 0 to the PLC turn OFF the contact and return to the monitor mode _ Qi OOO 225 on D 5 a L m az D 5 n O 5 NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q a s Kiowan N y sseN 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq 161 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test 16 5 5 When Counter C is selected Monitoring and testing can be performed for the counter C 1 Description of display Display Content Counter C 16 bit Counter C 32 bit 1 Displayed device 1 2 3 4 5 2 Displayed device No 3 Hexadecimal 4 ON OFF status 5 Reset 6 32 bit 7 Current value 8 Setting value 1 Displayed when hexadecimal is specified 2 Displayed while counter C is ON 3 Displayed while counter C is reset 4 S is displayed when a setting value is displayed 5 In the case of 32 bit counter C upper 5 digits are displayed in upper row and the lower 5 digits are displayed in lower row 2 Monitor mode operation Press the or buttons to change the device to monitor Counter C that is not used in the program is not displayed To return to the device selection screen press ESC button Example when C10 C20 C235 and C240 are used in the program Current value Setting value of C10 Current val
84. trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices c All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note The term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system When combining this product with other products please co
85. values can be changed between decimal and hexadecimal Special data register System Information Description _ Specifying decimal hexadecimal display format pon oe ON Hexadecimal OFF Decimal The display format can be changed for the following devices e Timer T current value setting value e Counter C current value setting value e Data register D 16 bit 32 bit FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 1 Outline SEU gt 17 Memory Cassette z i amp STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE 1 2 O PRECAUTIONS CAUTION gt e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged 2 e Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 1 3 53 O5 m F 17 1 Outline ae wn wn The memory cassette can be installed at the main unit and when installed the memory cassette s internal program is used in place of the internal EEPROM memory The loader function transfers reads and writes programs between the memory cassette and the internal EEPROM wh Ja sgueu zuleN uny S L 17 2 Specifications Buooys jqnosj _ Qi 17 2 1 Electrical
86. 08d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq 181 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 4 Removal 17 4 2 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are used together Removal procedure Raise the memory cassette detachment lever A in the right figure Remove the tapping screws B in the right figure which fix the memory cassette Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws Grasp the detachment lever D in the right figure and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette Attach the upper connector cover E in the right figure Fix the expansion board with the tapping screws F in the right figure provided for fixing the memory cassette e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3x8 shorter screws Do not use M3 x 16 longer screws removed in the step 2 because they may damage the main unit 182 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 5 Saved Data Content 17 5 Saved Data Content The following data is saved on the memory cassette Item Parameters Sequence programs Description Memory capacity setting Memory capacity 2 k 4 k 16 k steps Comment capacity File register capacity Modem initializin
87. 1 Default 0 Y001 Bias speed g peas Default 0 D 8353 Y001 Maximum speed l D 8354 Default 100000 Y001 Creep speed g DGASp Default 1000 D 8356 Y001 Zero return speed i D 8357 Default 50000 Y001 Acceleration time i BAIR Default 100 Y001 Deceleration time ERR Default 100 D 8360 to D 8369 Not used Ring counter D 8398 Up operation ring counter of 0 to 2 147 483 647 M8398 D 8399 in units of 1 ms 32 bit 1 1 ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON D 8415 to D 8418 D 8419 Not used Communication mode Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 D 8400 eomnmunicalon tomer seta Daal 3 D18402 Remaining points ofranemit data M8402 Dje403 Monitoring receive data points M6403 Da D18406 1o DIBA D 8409 aa D 8410 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 i Header 1 and 2 lt Default STX gt RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 DGAN E as i D 8412 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 i Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt E RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 29s a ARa a ine i RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 Pie Sane een i D 8416 kaa a aa FNC 87 ch1 D 8417 pisara 3 MODBUS communication ch1 Dau 3 Dam pao Dieas pr 3 ed oni re 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 196 Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 FX3S Series Programmable Controlle
88. 12 characteristics Stores the operation result in D100 FNC 23 ppiy 2112 K400 D100 105 S17 UORONJSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 10 Troubleshooting when using built in analog input This subsection describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Wiring e Special devices e Programs 1 Wiring check Check the following items for wiring e Use 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to separate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines For a detailed description of wiring refer to Subsection 11 3 6 2 Special device check Check whether the special devices for the PLC are being used correctly e Input data Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the channel e Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs e Error status Check that no error is detected in the PLC If an error is detected check the details of th
89. 3 For detailed explanation refer to the Programming Manual lt lt Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 cs Correspond Correspond 1 4 Number and name Operation and function ing special Number and name Operation and function ing special device device a oF 252 PLC status Flag PoE M 8020 ON when the result of addition COP M 8000 52 RUN monitor Te Ei Zero subtraction is 0 Sn NO contact p M 8021 ON when the result of subtraction is iad M8061 Borrow less than the min negative number i M 8001 RUN monitor or ees cB s M 8022 ON when carry occurs as a result 1 5 NC of addition or when an overflow O contact _ Carry oa M 8002 M8000 occurs as a result of shift operation o T 2 Initial pulse TEE 88 NO contact M8001 aan BMOV instruction FNC 15 2 l direction specification 5 M 8003 M8002 M 8025 to M 8027 Not used 1 6 Initial pulse M8003 M 8028 100 ms 10 ms timer changeover z NC contact Tng gt H 1 scan time eee ON when operation such as DSW f SS nD M 8004 ON when either M8061 M8062 execution complete iS UOCIOO AEN Ta S complergd 9z M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 is D8004 PLC mode o Error occurrence ON pees teen M 80317 this special auxiliary relay is 17 M18010 i Ua ee na Na Al E present values of T C D and 7E M 8011 ON and OFF in 10 ms cycle M 8032 2 special data registers are cleared to o lt 10 ms clock pulse ON 5 ms OFF
90. 3 5 Oo 8 4 ER DTR 5 o 7 5 SG GND i 5 2 J 6 6 DR DSR 7 Notused 8 Notused 9 Notused 144 FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Special Adapters 15 1 8 FX3uU 485ADP MB D External Dimensions 2 l e MASS Weight Approx 80 g 0 18 Ibs 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches l e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in 12 width or screws O e Accessories Label for indication of link g station number Manual supplied with a product e Terminal block European type 13 e Terminal resistance 330 9 110 Q built in E Danne e a cF l eee 7 0 28 74 2 92 14 358 TE Terminal resistance gt setting switch 2 9 330Q OPEN 1109 3 m 4 15 1 9 FX3U ENET ADP 2 External Dimensions 1 6 TRI Unit mm inches e MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs 3g e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in z width or screws e 4 E e Accessories Manual supplied with e product 17 e Connector 10BASE T 100BASE TX pS Se RJ45 8 3 J 4 e Terminal block External ground terminal 0000000 l M2 5 terminal block screw 20 5 0 81 81 5 3 21 SD S8 po oy Pin configuration S TE 1 TD 2 TD B 3 RD 4 Not used g 5 Not used o 6 RD 7 Not used j 8 Not used C 30 On 145 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 15
91. 5 3 and Subsection 7 5 4 Installation procedure Push out all DIN rail mounting hooks A in the right figure Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove B in the right figure onto the DIN rail Lock the DIN rail mounting hooks C in the following figure while pressing the PLC against the DIN rail 55 UONonNpoJu N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 Oo uononpou Npod suoneoyioeds Aa Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuo4y 8 Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 Installation In Enclosure 7 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 7 3 3 Removal of main unit Removal procedure Open the terminal block cover and remove the lower terminal block cover A in the right figure Disconnect the connecting cables including expansion board and special adapters Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the hole of the DIN rail mounting hook B in the right figure This step also applies for the DIN rail mounting hooks of the special adapters Move the flathead screwdriver
92. 59 DRVA Drive to Absolute 242 OR Compare lt Real Time Clock Control 243 O s 160 TCMP RTC Data Compare 244 OR Compare GD A 161 TZCP RTC Data Zone Compare a 162 TADD RTC Data Addition i Epa gt Sg ams 163 TSUB RTC Data Subtraction 246 OR Compare gt ee Og an 165 oe External Device Communication aan 166 TRD Read RTC data 270 IVCK Inverter Status Check 167 TWR Set RTC data 271 IVDR Inverter Drive 168 O 272 IVRD Inverter Parameter Read 2 169 HOUR Hour Meter 273 IVWR Inverter Parameter Write o 275 IVMC Inverter Multi Command 276 ADPRW MODBUS Read Write C 30 On Qao 0 O n 2 203 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number MEMO 204 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix C Discontinued models User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix C Discontinued models Bojeuy ul jing The table below lists the discontinued MELSEC F Series PLC models and programming tools described in 12 this manual O Ss Discontinued model Production stop date Repair acceptance period 2 FX3U 232ADP September 30 2013 Until September 30 2020 amp FX3U 485ADP FX 10P E June 30 2008 Until June 30 2015 4 3 53 O5 amp S wn P Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue Sun XJ 194 0 a s uoisue NaS S X4
93. 7D51501 Installation Manual expansion board product li ra Supp ee FX3U 485ADP MB Procedures for handling communication with JY997D26301 Installation Manual special adapter product Supplied bea PP FX3U 485ADP Procedures for handling communication with JY997D13801 Installation Manual special adapter product Supplied FX 485PC IF Procedures for handling the RS 232C RS 485 conversion with JY992D81801 product Hardware Manual interface Manuals for analog temperature control Manual Name E Common Additional FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Details of analog special function block FX3U 4AD Series User s Manual JY997D16701 FX3U 4DA FX3UC 4AD analog special adapter FX3U 09R619 ARIAS le Analog Control Edition ADP and analog expansion board FX3G BD E Analog input and temperature input When using each product refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supp ee FX3G 2AD BD Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input expansion with JY997D33501 product Installation Manual board Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with product Supplied with product FX3U 4AD ADP User s Manual FX3U 4AD PT ADP User s Manual FX3U 4AD PTW ADP User s Manual FX3U 4AD PNK ADP User s Manual FX3U 4AD TC ADP User s Manual
94. AD PNK ADP_ 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 resistance thermometer sensor input FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 ch thermocouple K J type temperature sensor input 1 The FX3U ENET ADP Ver 1 20 or later is applicable to the FX3s PLC 3 1 5 Display module E Model name Description FX3S 5DM Display module that can be installed on FX3S Series main unit 1 Supported in FX3s PLC Ver 1 20 or later 3 1 6 Memory cassette F Model name Description 32k step EEPROM memory with transfer switch PIG EEPROM Jal The FX3S Series PLC can hold 16 000 steps of memory but user program capacity is limited to 4 000 steps FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 Introduction of Products 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication Peripheral device connector FX 232AWC H RS 232C EJ 4 FX3u 232ADP MB Rs 232c B F Expansion board RS 232C E FX 232AWC H AA RS 232C J FX 30P EJ Fx 20P caBo No Shape of connector or combination with cable PA Fx 422caBo KI F2 232CAB 1 REPERE FX 232AWC H E Fx 232CAB 1 PA Fx 422caBo KI F2 232CAB 2 Half pitch 14 Pin FX 232AWC H FJ Fx 232CAB 2 FPA Fx 422caBo KI F2 232CAB ar FX 232AWC H F2 232CAB 1 FX 30P MINI DIN 8 Pin RS 422 B FX 20P CABO e N m ae_ RS 232C RS 422 cable Connection cablin
95. Contents Number S WEN Hed pue soinjeo4 Manuals for PLC main unit Oo E FX3S PLC main unit 5 ae Extractions of descriptions of input output specifications ene supplied wiring and installation of FX3S Series PLC main unit from ga with FX3S Series Hardware Manual JY997D48301 an aj roduc FX3S Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 P For the detailed explanation refer to this manual Supplied Extractions of descriptions of input output specifications an FX3S 30MC EO 2AD 499751701 Witing and installation of FX3S 30MCVED 2AD PLC main 4 Hardware Manual unit from FX3S Series User s Manual Hardware Edition on product G For the detailed explanation refer to this manual D Additional FX3S Series User s Manual 2 eal or nardware ot BAT Senes ese m unik ys JY997D48601 including input output specifications wiring installation O9R535 Manual Hardware Edition this manual x and maintenance E Programming Additional FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3U FX3UC Details of sequence programming for FX3S Series Series Programming Manual JY997D16601 including explanation for basic instructions applied 0O9R517 Qi eau manua Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition instructions and various devices JE z Oo a MELSEC Q L F rar es Additional Structured Programming Manual SH 080782 Programming methods specifications functions etc 43JWO06 Manual required to create structured programs Fundamentals
96. Crimp 3 2 0 137 screw terminal 6 2 mm 0 24 5 or less y D S S 5 l 3 2 0 13 839 Y 6 2 mm 0 24 Se Terminal a or less lt Reference gt 6 QU Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification Pressure Bonding Tool 38 2 FV1 25 B3A c3 JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL FV1 25 B3A ETI VAUS 3 MFG CO LTD JST FV2 MS3 O e When two wires are connected to one terminal 3 2 0 137 7 Terminal Crimp 5 6 2 mm 0 24 JEC screw terminal a or less a 6 3 mm or 25 S or more 3 2 0 137 6 2 mm 0 24 Sf er eee ee Si Terminal 6 3 mm 0 25 or more lt Reference gt Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification Pressure Bonding Tool JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD JST a UL Listed YA 1 JST 1 T a a WM se D D O s13 UN0N 67 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 8 2 2 Terminal block for European expansion board and special adapters The expansion boards and special adapters of a terminal block type have terminal blocks for European 1 Applicable products Classification Model name Expansion board FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP Special adapters EX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP 2 Compliant electric wires and tightening torque
97. FLT Conversion to Floating Point Move and Compare High Speed Processing 10 Compare 50 Refresh 11 Zone Compare 51 Po 12 MOV Move 52 MTR Input Matrix 13 Shift Move 53 High Speed Counter Set 14 CML Complement 54 High Speed Counter Reset 15 Block Move 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare 16 Fill Move 56 SPD Speed Detection 17 Los l 57 Pulse Y Output 18 Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 58 Pulse Width Modulation 19 BIN Conversion to Binary 59 Acceleration Deceleration Setup Arithmetic and Logical Operation Handy Instruction 20 ADD Addition 60 IST Initial State 21 SUB Subtraction 61 SER Search a Data Stack 22 MUL Multiplication 62 Absolute Drum Sequencer 23 DIV Division 63 Incremental Drum Sequencer 24 Increment 64 o o 25 Decrement 65 fe 26 Logical Word AND 66 ALT Alternate State 27 WOR Logical Word OR 67 Ramp Variable Value 28 Logical Exclusive OR 68 Rotation and Shift Operation External FX I O Device 30 ROR O Rotation Right 70 oe 31 Rotation Left 71 Pe 32 fi 72 DSW Digital Switch Thumbwheel Input 34 Bit Shift Right 74 Seven Segment With Latch 35 Bit Shift Left 75 L 2 36 Word Shift Right 76 C 37 Word Shift Left 77 Le 38 Shift Write FIFO FILO Control 78 f 39 Shift Read FIFO Control 79 ae 202 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order o
98. FX3U 3A ADP D 8280 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch Input data Ch1 D 8281 Input data Ch2 Output data Ch2 Input data Ch2 D 8282 Input data Ch3 Output data Ch3 Output data m Cc a C ee D 8289 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 Number Operation and function FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP Ch1 temperature Ch1 temperature Ch1 temperature D 8280 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch2 temperature Ch2 temperature Ch2 temperature D 8281 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch3 temperature Ch3 temperature Ch3 temperature D 8282 measurement data measurement data measurement data Ch4 temperature Ch4 temperature Ch4 temperature D 8283 measurement data measurement data measurement data D 8284 Averaging time for Ch1 Averaging time for Ch1 Averaging time for Ch1 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8285 Averaging time for Ch2 Averaging time for Ch2 Averaging time for Ch2 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8286 Averaging time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch3 Averaging time for Ch3 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8287 Averaging time for Ch4 Averaging time for Ch4 Averaging time for Ch4 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 Model code D 8289 PT K20 Model code K10 Model code K11 Number PTW K21 200 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B Instruction List Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions Appendix B In
99. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manua
100. High speed counter This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the high speed counter Chapter 10 oS examples of programming aE pea This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the built in variable S Built in analog ae Chapter 11 analog potentiometer and the built in analog input and programming examples e Output wiring This chapter contains explanations for the output wiring and wiring precautions Chapter 12 Examples wing foresees This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring input output devices Chapter 13 7 for main uses This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for test operation and a Test operation adjustment i Di adjustment maintenance and error check items and measures to be taken upon Chapter 14 maintenance and error check occurrence of error Gj 2 Extension devices Chapter 15 Division ating TT Re exensien produis 10r Special This chapter contains explanations for the external dimensions and terminal layout 8 functions such as communication Chapter 15 For details refer to the manual for each extension device Suv control and analog F 2 g 3 Optional products Chapter 16 to Chapter17 og O Division Reference ee lt Display module This chapter contains explanation of the specifications external dimensions mounting Chapter 16 Play procedures and operating procedures for display modules FX3S 5DM p 9 This chapter contains exp
101. I F CCIE Cont CC Link NET 10 H Board NET II PLC Board Board al gt PLC side F CC Link Ethernet C24 GOT CCIE Field Head Module Module Module Master Local Module EE PLOMode FXCPU 00S PC side I F Serial Setting RS 232C include FX USB AW 7 FX3U USB BD ae 7 Cancel No Specification Setup COM Port COM 1 Time Out Sec 5 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps s CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H nr System Image 11 gt TEL FXCPU OK CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Cancel EE Select USB Accessing Host Station fee 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting 45 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou ONpoJd ep O D Q las fe 5 n jesoydued pue UOIS 9 wasis uoneinByuoy uoneleysu I Bui A ddns Jamod Bum ndu O pue uonevedaiy CO h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series 5 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series When monitoring circuits device monitor etc or reading writing programs in an FX3Gc PLC from GX Works2 using the FA transparent function by way of USB in the GO
102. J s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 8 Memory cassette precautions for use 17 7 2 Reading RD FX3G EEPROM 32L lt PLC Programs are read from the PLC s internal RAM memory to the memory cassette Required condition The PLC must be stopped and the PROTECT switch must be OFF Install the memory cassette on the main unit Set the PROTECT switch to OFF Refer to Section 17 3 for the installation procedure e Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC e Turn the PLC power ON e Raise the memory cassette s eject lever i il Press the RD key 1 time kge RD LED zo 32L PLC The RD LED lights and a preparation status is established RD key o oT O proTECT w I e To cancel press the WR key Press the RD key again Reading is executed and the RD LED blinks e It takes several seconds to read data from the built in EEPROM The RD LED flickers while data is read Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Reading is completed when the RD LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cassette from the PLC then turn the PROTECT switch ON Refer to Section 17 4 for the removal procedure 17 8 Memory cassette precautions for use Tapping screws provided fo
103. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS MESEC P Hardware Edition Main Unit AC Power Type FX3S LIMR ES FX3s OMT ES FX3S LIMT ESS FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD DC Power Type FX3S LIMR DS FX3S LIMT DS FX3S LIMT DSS Display Module FX3S 5DM Memory Cassette FX3G EEPROM 32L GHEE S2fety Precautions ED Read these precautions before use Before installation operation maintenance or inspection of this product thoroughly read through and understand this manual and all of the associated manuals Also take care to handle the module properly and safely This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories and A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe WARNING incr Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight CAU Tl O N personal injury or physical damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by A CAUTION may also cause severe injury It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC
104. PLC turn OFF the contact and return to the monitor mode O lt r O m gt lt mr 49 gt w O Was Sex4 ginpoy Aejdsig a s Howay Ni y sseN 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq 163 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test 16 5 6 When Data register D is selected Monitoring and testing can be performed for the data register D 1 Description of display 1 2 3 4 5 1 Displayed when hexadecimal is specified Display Content 1 2 B 4 5 Displayed device Displayed device No Hexadecimal Current value 2 32 bit 2 In the case of 16 bit data register D current value is displayed in upper row In the case of 32 bit data register D upper 5 digits are displayed in upper row and the lower 5 digits are displayed in lower row 2 Monitor mode operation Press the or buttons to change the device to monitor Return to the selecting a device screen press ESC button Example when data register D 16 bit is monitored Press the button to increase the device number by 1 Press the button to decrease the device number by ma Press and hold the or button for 1 second or more to increase or decrease the value at high speed In the case of the list shown below the screen display is as follows
105. PLC Running 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 1 Self diagnostic function When the PLC s power is turned on its self diagnostic function starts automatically If there are no problems with the hardware parameters or program the PLC will start and the RUN command refer to Section 14 2 is given RUN LED is lit If any problems are found the ERR LED flashes or lights 14 3 2 Test functions Functions of the programming tool to turn on off the PLC devices and change the current values settings are effective or ineffective depending on the PLC status as shown below v Effective A Conditionally effective Ineffective In Item stopped status sa nares Devices used in program A vii orcible 7 Change of current values of timers counters data Devices used in program A2 v When the program memory is the built in EEPROM v When the program memory is in the memory cassette i Change of settings of timers and counters and the PROTECT switch is on When the program memory is in the memory cassette y p and the PROTECT switch is off 1 Forcible ON OFF The forcible ON OFF function is effective on the input relays X output relays Y auxiliary relays M state S timers T and counters C The forcible ON OFF function can turn on or off the devices only for one scan While the PLC is running the function is substantially effective in clearing the current values of the timers T counters
106. PLSY FNC 50 PWM FNC 58 and or PLSR FNC 59 instructions Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution of communication If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC may stop communication after that If the PLC stops communication set the PLC to the STOP mode once and then set it to the RUN mode again e IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVMC FNC275 and ADPRW FNC276 instructions e Instructions for falling edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse LDF ANDF or ORF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the target device When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse PLF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the device that is set as the operation condition It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse e Instructions for rising edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition device
107. Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special adapter Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature sensor input special adapter Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature sensor input special adapter Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 temperature sensor input special adapter Procedures for handling the 4 ch thermocouple input special adapter FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Manual Model Manual Name Na Der Contents Code E Analog output When using each product refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied FX3G 1DA BD Procedures for handling the 1 ch analog output expansion with JY997D33601 Installation Manual board product Supplied 3y 4DA ADP Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog output special with JY997D14001 g ied User s Manual adapter product E Analog input output When using each product refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition SuppIE FX3U 3A ADP Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input and 1 ch with JY997D35601 User s Manual analog output special adapter product Manuals for positioning cont
108. RN instruction FNC156 D8464 9 High speed counter function Y000 Clear signal device D M 8380 to M 8387 specification function enabled IM 8388 Contact for high speed counter f DSZR instruction FNC150 function change M 8465 ZRN instruction FNC156 D8465 18380 MBG nbe specification function enabled SD Function changeover device for sD i 2e BBS S7 ee Ring counter OAOA TO SAGE i 33 nase Ring counter operation D8398 M 8487 USB communication error D8487 B in units of 1 ms 32 bits D8399 M 8488 M 8399 M 8489 Special parameter error D8489 z i al 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 3 Cleared when PLC switches pall RUN to STOP or S when RS2 instruction ch1 is OFF 2 1 ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after Len z M8398 turns ON Used when the SNTP function setting is set to Use in the time setting parameters 191 sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Correspond Number and name Operation and function ing special device FX3U ENET ADP ch1 M18490 to M1849 M 8492 IP address storage area write request M 8493 IP address storage area write i completion M 8494 IP address storage area write error M 8495 IP address storage area clear request M 8496 IP address storage area clear completion M 8497 IP
109. Ss Q Q Q z O 2 2 1 Front Panel Factory default configuration standard 3 SOWeN Hed pue soinjeo4 2 1 3 nl 38 ac MELSEG FXss Ss 2 g 10 9 8 2 3 1 Top cover Mount the expansion board display module and memory cassette under this cover 2 Terminal names The signal names for power supply input and output terminals are shown 3 Terminal block covers The covers can be opened for wiring 5 Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running the unit power is on UUV lt 4 Input display LEDs red When an input terminal X000 or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights D ge SG 5 Peripheral device connecting The peripheral device connector variable analog potentiometers analog inputs and RUN p 3 connector cover STOP switch are located under this cover 2 z 6 Operation status display LEDs The operation status of the PLC can be checked with the LEDs The LEDs turn off light and flash according to the following table For details on the operation status refer to Section 14 5 6 LED name Display color Description Of O POW ON while power is on the PLC 2s RUN ON while the PLC is running a ERK Red O Flashing when a program error occurs S Red O Lights when a CPU error occurs 7 Output display LEDs red When an output terminal YOOO or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights 7 8 The y
110. T1000 Series make sure to execute the following setting Double click the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination gt Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting Select USB Transfer Setup Connection1 PC side I F CCIE Cont CC Link NET 10 H Board NET II PLC Board Board al gt PLC side F CC Link Ethernet C24 GOT CCIE Field Head Module Module Module Master Local Module KE PLC Mode FXCPU PC side I F Serial Setting x G include FX USB AW FX3U USB BD Cancel include FX USB Aw FX3U USB BD C USB Cancel Pies Cancel Setup COM Port CoM 1 ESR Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps T CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link NET 10 H da System Image TiO TEL FXCPU OK CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Cancel Accessing Host Station inno PC side I F Serial Setting Select USB 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 5 Select FXCPU via GOT direct coupled transparent mode PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT PLC Module CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter Setup PLC Mode FXCPU x Cancel via GOT direct coupled transparent mode va au emetj tr
111. The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of a timer TO D8030 The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of the timer TO T gt The setting range in this example using TO 100 ms timer in from 0 to 25 5 sec 2 Example 2 The current value of VR2 multiplied by 10 is used as the set value of a timer T1 M8000 eg D8031 Ko DO D1 The value of D8031 is multiplied by 10 and stored in RUN monitor DO D1 DO seeeeeeeeeccceceeeeeeeee The current value of VR2 multiplied by 10 is used as the C 1 gt set value of the timer T1 The setting range in this example using T1 100 ms timer is from O to 255 sec 100 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 Built in analog input function Bojeuy ul yIng 11 3 1 Outline of functions The main unit has two built in analog voltage inputs shown in the figure below 1 2 A D conversion data will be automatically written to special data registers of the PLC O Ss Analog input enlarged view avi L t tC S S i XO 7 X2 ii X4 X6 T X10 x X12 a X14 T a X17 Fa v 3232 D X16 KUAD C V1 13 RUN Al ITI v4 ERRO G V S FXas 30M oe MELSEE FXss 3553 Ea 6dddl ifa o e 00006 E ao wn 88 amp ov Yo Yi y2 Y4 com
112. Twist the end of the stranded cable so that loose wires will not stick out Do not solder plate the end of the cable Approx 6 mm 0 24 3 Tightening torque Set the tightening torque to 0 5 to 0 6 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Caution When tightening a grounding terminal use a screwdriver suitable for the terminal screw The screwdriver which does not suit the thread groove is used tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the above use the following screwdriver or an appropriate replacement lt Reference gt Manufacturer Model name Phoenix Contact Co Ltd SZF 1 0 6x3 5 69 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suojeoyioeds Aa Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis uoneinByuoy uoneleysuy i 1 T a a WD se D D O s13 UN09 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 8 2 4 Grounding terminal of the FX3v ENET ADP The grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP is a M2 5 screw 1 Applicable cables Electric wire size 0 5 to 1 5 mm AWG 20 to 16 2 Treatment of electric wire ends e When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is Twist
113. Y7 Yu Y12 Y14 MR ES 2AD 24V COMO COM1 COM2 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y10 COM4 Y13 Y15 LOT 139 Ja uny S L 11 3 2 Applicable PLC Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN The following models have built in analog inputs Applicable PLC FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD 11 3 3 Analog input performance specifications _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue Item Input specification Analog input range 0 to 10 V DC Input resistance 115 7 KQ Absolute maximum input 0 5 V 15 V ZO Digital output 10 bits binary SG Deve ACAN D8270 The digital value of CH1 is stored a D8271 The digital value of CH2 is stored o Resolution 10 mV 10 V 1000 T 1 0 100 mV for 10 V full scale oaia ccir when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C 1 7 y 2 0 200 mV for 10 V full scale e when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C p amp n oO AID conversion time ee o lt The data will be updated at every scan time of the PLC 10209 en gt f 1000 y A a 2 cy Input characteristics i Se O Se aa l SD S l 2s jz eo Q 0 10V 10 2V S P Analog input Insulation method No insulation between each channel or the PLC B 0 point a Occupied points This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the a PLC e sj pow penuljucosiq 101 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog
114. Z 1940 a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q Howay N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 2 External power supply For driving the load use a smoothing power supply of 5 to 30 V DC that can output current two or more times the rated current of the fuse connected to the load circuit 3 Insulation of circuit The internal circuit of the PLC and the output transistor are insulated with a photocoupler The common blocks are separated from one another 4 Display of operation When power is applied to the photocoupler the LED is lit and the output transistor is turned on 5 Response time The time from when the PLC drives or shuts down the photocoupler until the transistor is turned on or off is shown in the following table Output number Load current 5 to 24 V DC When using an instruction related to pulse train output or positioning wee make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100 mA 5 to 24 V DC Y002 to Y015 24 V DC 200 mA or more The transistor OFF time is longer under lighter loads For example under a load of 24 V DC 40 mA the response time is approx 0 3 ms When response performance is required under light loads provide a dummy resistor as shown below to increase the load
115. a component for fitting in a suitable Equipment requirements and tests enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 2 2007 11 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Caution for compliance with EC Directive 1 Installation in Enclosure Programmable logic controllers are open type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control boxes Please use the FX3S Series programmable logic controllers while installed in conductive shielded control boxes Please secure the control box lid to the control box for conduction Installation within a control box greatly affects the safety of the system and aids in shielding noise from the programmable logic controller Caution for Analog Products in use The analog products have been found to be compliant to the European standards in the aforesaid manual and directive However for the very best performance from what are in fact delicate measuring and controlled output devices Mitsubishi Electric would like to make the following points As analog devices are sensitive by nature their use should be considered carefully For users of proprietary cables integral with sensors or actuators these users should follow those manufacturers installation requirements Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used If NO other EMC protection is provided users may experience temporary loss or accuracy between 10 10 i
116. a i nae Requires program Section 16 14 estes value display setting decimal and hexadecimal oe oS 2 Caution bp 5 88 Q e When a keyword is registered in the PLC only Time display and setting and Error display valid invalid are displayed and other items cannot be displayed If the OK button is pressed when a keyword is registered the error display blinks for 5 seconds Qi OCcO e A sequence program is required to enable a hexadecimal display of the timer T counter C and data Bae register D 16 bit 32 bit current values 2 m e When the scan time is long the display in the display module is updated at low speed 2 Setting the constant scan mode M8039 and D8039 can improve the display update timing For details on constant scan mode refer to the Programming Manual NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig a s Kiowan N y sseN 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt Sj pow penuljucosiq 155 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 Flowing of the Screen Display 16 4 Flowing of the Screen Display Time display Time setting Hold for 2 seconds or longer Refer to Section 16 6 a 4 I I I I I I I I I I I I a 4 ay i Selecting a device Error display XYMS TCD Refer to Subsection 16 5 2 Refer to Section 16 7 h Monitor test LE
117. address storage area clear error M 8498 IP address change function enable flag M18400 t0 MJES T 192 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device PLC status Default value is 200 ms in 1 ms steps D 8000 Writes from system ROM at power Watchdog timer N g g Value overwritten by program is valid after END or WDT instruction execution D 8001 2 3 KEK PLC type and D8101 system version Caco 1 00 F X3S Series e 2 2 K steps 4 D8102 e 4 4 K steps Stores the memory type built in D 8002 Memory capacity D 8003 EEPROM or memory cassette and Memory type the PROTECT switch ON OFF j status of the memory cassette 2 D 8004 leloleji Error number M MGOUS 8061 to 8068 When M8004 is ON 005 6 ONS Clock Accumulated instruction execution D 8010 3 time from 0 step Present scan time in units of 0 1 ms D 801 1 Minimum value of scan time Minimum scan time in units of 0 1 ms D 8012 Maximum value of scan time Maximum scan time in units of 0 1 ms D 8013 0 to 59 seconds i Second data for real time clock D 8014 0 to 59 minutes i Minute data for real time clock D 8015 0 to 23 hours Hour data for rea
118. agnostics on the menu bar and the diagnosis of PLC will start E MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Untitled Project PRG Write MAIN 1 Step mE Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagnostics Tool Window Help P Xx S F O 77 S D a7 DBAS aB ikea Ec Dionosties Sai E i H V H Ethernet Diagnostics gt OIR A A Jai i aro da Beek isosceles i Navigation aa Sa Une eg ie 1e v CC IE Field Diagnostics Project ae A MELSECNET Diagnostics CP 2 i Sy 2 Bh END Parameter Global Device Comment Program Setting POU 2 Local Device Comment A Device Memory uny S L soueu zuleN Buooys jqnosj _ Qi 3 Check the results of diagnosis suo do pue Sun XZ 1940 Display the following window to check the errors Example one error occurs PLC Diagnostics a s uoisue r Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection RS 232C System Image ao a 255 wO Error Information Open the help window of PD Error dum Era Help GX Works2 to check the Oz i i error details o Status No Error Step Current Error Year MonthjDay w eee sie ict The error in PLC A 60 Parameter Error 2011 11 29 11 48 14 Major Error OD s d d A Moderate Error IS ISp aye A Minor Error Change the window size and position after error jump 1 7 The LED status PARE Mon
119. als cccccccsescceceeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeesaees 18 2 Features and Part Names 19 ZA Maor FC ARUN CS aana a e a aa e E tind Seale a ae 19 22 Names and FUNCIONS OLP ANS ener E E AE 21 22 FRON PANGI aara E A E E AS 21 222 ES ap e a E E a eee eee eee 23 3 Introduction of Products 24 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names cccccccecccceeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeesaeeeees 24 SMEs MAMANS eaaa e eE a a AET a a A E 25 Sekka EXPANSION DOIN S reure a E a o e Rene ere a ee eee eee 26 21 2 Connector conversion adapter ioeo a a ah teh eh A a ec cae 26 SIA SP OCClal aG aD lens eraa a a a deh seeker nie Shasta 26 Selo JOISDIAYy MOda aa eaten cine nia aan eaccntsten iam cea pantie iene taro 26 210 Memory CAs oe Me rca ctaancchiaedsa E tent cede onsmnc ast tame EEE 26 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program COMMUNICATION ccccseeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeesaaes 27 Deal Programming LOO sacar wah entities o0Gs Aeiea esas a E wah bea E Mlobamebaemneced 28 3 2 2 COMMUNICATION Cables estesero r aaa E OAE aR EOE Eaei eE AEE ERARA NEERI EAEE 28 3 49 CONV ETIORS AMC MMe MAC saini an a a a a e a a a 28 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units 29 4 1 Generic Specifications aesccccdescaeatsasacchadetadentaeaaace adahcdea tach narhadahnssansadedenadesadeateiacdencddneseuteeiSocaengateets 29 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance
120. ameplate manufacturer s serial number 1340001 MODEL FX3S 30MR ES ees 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 21w S N 11340001 an OUT 30VDC 240VDC zP Illl_ Right side 2A COS 1 9864 MADE IN JAPAN Actual product nameplate differs from the example shown above 7 TEA Control number Month Example April 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 2013 Last two digit of year 2 Checking the front of the product The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number LOT on the front at the bottom of the product MR ES 5 LOT 134 i EEEIEE T Month Example April 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 2013 Last two digit of year 40 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 1 2 Version check method The PLC version number can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001 D8101 Dori Se eee ees Ena PLC type and L Version information Example Ver 1 00 version PLC type Example 28 FX3s PLC 5 1 3 Version upgrade history FX3S Series performed the follow
121. and S S terminals e For source input connect the OV and S S terminals In the case of DC power type e For sink input connect the and S S terminals e For source input connect the and S S terminals Connect sensors and switches to the terminals For details refer to Chapter 9 Wire the output Y terminals Connect loads to the terminals For details refer to Chapter 12 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures UOI ONPO U The cable connecting procedures are explained below 8 2 1 Terminal block Main unit NO The terminal block of main unit is the M3 screw For the terminal block of a built in analog input refer to Chapter 11 SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 1 Terminal block screw size and tightening torque The terminal block screw and tightening torque is shown below OO Main unit 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Z3 2 Wire end treatment ge The solderless terminal size depends on the terminal screw size and wiring method p Use solderless terminals of the following size Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 to 0 8 Nem 4 Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may D cause equipment failures or malfunctions 8 e When one wire is connected to one terminal 8 Terminal
122. ansparent mode Select FXCPU Select via GOT direct coupled transparent mode 6 Click the OK button to finish the setting 46 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 5 5 Double click the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination gt Connection Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT Select FXCPU via GOT direct coupled transparent mode in setting shown below and put Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series UOI ONPO U When monitoring circuits device monitor etc in an FX3S PLC from GX Works2 using the transparent 2 port function in the GOT F900 Series make sure to execute the following setting NO target data name in the Navigation window of GX Worksz2 The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting OO Select RS 232C in setting shown below and set COM port and Transmission Speed 237 g O Transfer Setup Connection1 O 2 co PC side I F QS i oO CCIE Cont CC Link Ethernet CCIE Field Q Series NET II PLC 5 NET 10 H Board Board Board Bus Board Board Board PLC side I F i 4 CC Link E
123. arameter error M8489 D8489 8101 Special parameter setting time out error 8102 Special parameter setting error Continues operation 8103 Special parameter transfer target unconnected error 8104 Special parameter unsupported function Action lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is started gt The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is started gt The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement Check servo wiring and parameter setting Also check ABS instruction Check to make sure the port is not specified by another instruction Check to make sure the input X as specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is not being used for the following purposes Input interrupt High speed counter C235 to C255 Pulse catch M8170 to M8175 SPD instruction Check to make sure the pulse output destination is not being driven by another positioning instruction When the memory cassette is used check
124. ared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Correspond ing special device Number and name Operation and function Advanced function M 8163 to M 8167 Not used M 8161 4 8 bit process mode M 8162 High speed parallel link mode SMOV instruction FNC 13 M 8168 HEX data handling function T Pulse catch TAA Notused N N Network M18180 to pMje182 Notused oo Data communication error eae Master station Data communication error eee Slave station No 1 Data communication error pence Slave station No 2 Data communication error ene Slave station No 3 Data communication error oo panes Slave station No 4 Beets Data communication error meres Slave station No 5 Data communication error ees Slave station No 6 Data communication error mene Slave station No 7 M 8191 Data communication in execution M 8192 to M 8199 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 4 Applicable to RS instruction FNC 80 ASCI instruction FNC 82 HEX instruction FNC 83 and CCD instruction FNC 84 5 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Not used 189 Bojeuy ul jing Buum nding N 10 buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q Howay N Q las N ep D D 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s
125. as shown in the right figure to draw out the DIN rail mounting hooks of all devices Remove the product from the DIN rail C in the right figure Push in the DIN rail mounting hooks D in the right figure 23 43557 e900 Yous 12 13 99000 14 15 16 17 N MRES LOT 134 56 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 screws 7 4 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 screws UOI ONPO U The product can be installed directly in the enclosure with screws 7 4 41 Hole pitches for direct mounting NO The product mounting hole pitches are shown below 1 Main unit A SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Unit mm inches 4 0 16 FX3S 10MR ES 3 FX3S 10MT ES 39 FX35 10MT ESS Be OQ r FX3S 10MR DS S FX3S 10MT DS FX3S 10MT DSS 52 2 05 4 FX3S 14MR ES FX3S 14MT ES a FX3S 14MT ESS jab FX3S 14MRIDS So FX3S 14MT DS k FX3S 14MT DSS 5 FX3S 20MR ES Saa FX3S 20MT ES EE oe FX3S 20MT ESS 82S 67 2 64 S D FX3S 20MR DS al FX3S 20MT DS FX3S 20MT DSS 6 FX3S 30MR ES 2AD real FX3S 30MT ES 2AD oS D FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD c 92 3 63 Si FX3S 30MR DS S FX3S 30MT DS FX3S 30MT DSS 2 Special adapter B uonejJesu Un
126. aused by us ngs wn output element fracture due to load short circuiting ace cn 2 gt represents vacant terminals 25 J WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION 17 oz e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally p 3 Doing so may damage the product S P U 3 P S17 UORONJSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq 117 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automa
127. ay for that interrupt station M8050 to M8058 is ON the M18072 Parallel link M 8052 interrupt will not operate M ON when operating i Input interrupt For example turning M8050 ON Parallel link I20L disable snag ie Hea M 8073 ON when M8070 or M8071 i M 8053 iia Pea Cane opie aes a iets setting is incorrect not processed even in an allowable program area Memory information IBSOL disabl i PTAR If an input interrupt or timer M 8101 to M 8104 Not used 4 i seks meee pecs Wile specal M 8105 ON during writing in RUN mode Input interrupt auxiliary relay for that interrupt 1400 disable M8050 to M8058 is OFF M 8106 to M 8108 Not used Input interrupt 805E a The no will be FX3G 4EX BD l accepted 5 Input interrupt b The interrupt routine will be M 8112 PADU ISOL disable processed promptly if it is M 8113 5 BX1 input M 8056 permitted by the El FNC r Timer interrupt 04 instruction However if Mj8114 BX2 input B00 disable the DI FNC 05 instruction M 81155 BX3 input F disables interrupts the M 8057 interrupt program will not FX3G 2EYT BD Timer interrupt be processed until El FNC 7 M 81165 BYO output I7LIL disable 04 permits the interrupts aso M 8117 BY1 output ee i 3 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON isable M 8059 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 5 Supported in Ver
128. ber and name Operation and function ing special device device Step ladder Error detection M 8040 While M8040 is turned ON transfer f M 8060 Transfer disable between states is disabled M 8061 PEC hardware error D8061 M 8041 1 TANS Er MONT INHA SAE IS M 8062 PLC PP communication error D8062 enabled in automatic operation Transfer start mode M 8063 3 Serial communication error 1 D8063 M 8042 Pulse output is given in response to i M 8064 D8064 Start pulse a start input D8065 4 D8069 M 8043 Set this in the last state of zero M 8065 Syntax error D8314 Zero return retumi mode F complete l D8315 M 8044 1 Set this when machine zero return f sted Zero point condition is detected M 8066 Circuit error D8314 M 8045 Disables the all output reset D8315 All output reset function when the operation mode is D8067 disable changed D8069 4 IMjg046 2 ON when M8047 is ON and either of yan 47 M 8067 Operation eller D8314 STL state ON SO to S255 is active D8315 M 8047 2 D8068 STL monitoring D8040 to D8047 are enabled when D8040 to M 8068 Operation error latch D8312 M8047 is ON D8047 D8313 enable 104 o MEOS m 7 Interrupt disable Parallel link Parallel link 1 iat as M 8070 4 Set M8070 when using master 000 disable alae M 805177 If an input interrupt or timer a Parallel link f input interrupt interrupt occurs while a special f M 8071 Set M8071 when using slave 1100 disable auxiliary rel
129. beween MPS MRO and MPP on incored incorrect in the entire circuit block or when the relationship 6616 bperaion l combirnalici between a pair of instructions is incorrect P Modify the instructions in the program mode so that their Instruction below is not connected to bus line mutual relationship becomes correct 6617 STL RET MCR P DI El FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND or END STL MC or MCR can be used only in main program but it is 6618 a used elsewhere e g in interrupt routine or subroutine 6619 Invalid instruction is used in FOR NEXT loop STL RET MC MCR interrupt pointer or IRET 136 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC pel pe ee Contents of error Action occurrence Circuit error M8066 D8066 6620 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level exceeded am val inetucton programmed wifi STRET ot ae eae eaten Slaps MG MCR d ANGUR PONEN ene ohne between a pair of instructions is incorrect 6627 Operation No STL instruction Modify the instructions in the program mode so that their os Invalid instruction is used in main program mutual relationship becomes correct interrupt pointer SRET or IRET 6629 No P or interrupt pointer 6630 No SRET or IRET instruction STL RET or MC MCR instructions in subroutine 6631 SRET p
130. cability 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability 5 6 1 Other peripheral equipment applicability Model name Applicability GOT1000 Series Applicable GOT F900 Series Not available FX 10DM SETO Not available Remarks Standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which support the FX3S PLC are required For details refer to the GOT manual This series is subject to the following restrictions when connected using unsupported standard monitor OS communication driver or option OS Contents of restrictions e When connected using standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which support the FX3G PLC Programming is enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3S PLC and the FX3G PLC e When connected using standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which do not support the FX3G PLC Programming is enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3S PLC and the FX1N PLC The list editor function for MELSEC FX is not available When using the list editor function for MELSEC FX upgrade the standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS to the version compatible with the FX3S PLC Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Programming is enable
131. cam suncameaay 157 16 522 Seleting a CGV CC ci ctc ee aioe ai a Od wet eal a el alle aes 157 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 16 5 3 When Input X Output Y Auxiliary relay M or State S is selected cccceee 158 16 5 4 When Timer T iS selected ccccccccceeeeecceesececceuseeeeseeueeeecsueucecseeuseeesseeusensssasesesssagssseeesseas 160 16 5 5 When Counter C iS Sel6CleG 3 22 isis tececedes ean a aa ere eer 162 16 5 6 When Data register D is selected cc ceecccccsseeceeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeessaaeeeeseaeeeeeneas 164 16 60 Time Display and S CTU Geezer esdet ates catrend a adnedead Ahaanaa deena vnecsteeed 166 ge Ga act e EB 11 0 1 Artec erence cn eee ee eee re ee 166 16 8 5DM Control Functions Restrictions From PLC cccccsseeeeecsseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeesaeneeeeeas 167 16 81 System IN Omano ESE As cs hi Ged sete oh ee arao aea etaan a SRA uae 167 16 8 2 System information setting program example cccccccceseeeceeceseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeseesaaees 168 16 9 Specified Device Monitor FUNCTION cccccccccseccceseeecesceceueeecencecseeeseacesseeesausessuseeseasessuseeees 168 16 9 1 System information specified device monitor function cceceecccceeececeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeaees 168 16 9 2 Program example sis auaterdanwtntss 5 uoutia
132. cations uononpou The input specifications for the main unit are explained below For the specifications of the built in analog input refer to Chapter 11 N 4 3 1 24V DC Input sink source For details on sink input and source input refer to Subsection 9 1 1 Specification Item FX3S 10MU FX3S 14MU FX3S 20MU FX3S 30MU Number of input points 12 points 16 points SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO Input connecting type Fixed terminal block M3 screw 5 U Input form Sink Source S E AC power type 24 V DC 10 SS pAg g DC power type 20 4 to 26 4 V DC S l X000 to X007 3 3 KQ Input impedance Input signal X000 to X007 7 mA 24 V DC E OED ie EAG ON input X000 to X007 4 5 mA or more SUOI EOIJIO8dS OFF input sensitivity current 1 5 mA or less Input response time Approx 10 ms 5 Smk moul No voltage contact input l P NPN open collector transistor aa Input signal form S H Seat No voltage contact input 79 P PNP open collector transistor g Q Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Input operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven e AC power type 6 Sink input wiring Source input wiring OL 32 23 z aA a D Input circuit configuration e DC power type Sink input wiring 8 UD FE aL oo 3s lt 5 Q 3 S a 1 Input impedance 2 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout
133. cccecceeeceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeees 128 14 2 2 Use of several running Stopping Methods cccceeecceceseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeesasaeeeesaeas 129 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running cccccceccceeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 130 120 3 lS Ol GIAGMOS IC TUCO MN gee sics snr fact a a S coe cece ae cek nesta setceaeded eeu adacede aevassdetesghsett 130 Tha POSE TUCO S esre en E E ecetaeeasnesdad ante die 130 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 14 323 Program modification TUN CHO 2 ceed dee onctutiee ds E EE 130 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection ccccccceecceseeceeeceueecaeeceuceceueecueeseueesaeessueesseesaueesseeeas 131 14 41 Periodi INSPECTION isansa a Ouleze seen cos ss E a e a aa 131 14 4 2 Maintenance product life of relay contacts ce eecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeaaeas 131 14 5 TMo bleshooting WIth LEDS danrin E E E 132 14 5 1 POW LED on flashing off 0000nn00nnoaannoannnaannnannnnannnnnnnnnnnernnenonrnonnrrrnnrernrernnrronrresnnrnnnsnnrenneene 132 145 2 ERR LED TOnfasSNNg On eioten E E cee 132 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes ccccseecccceeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaees 133 14 6 1 Operation and check by GX Works2 ccccccccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaeeeeeaseeee
134. cesseeeceeseeeceegeeecseseeessuseeessageeesseseesssages 45 5 3 1 instalation o WS BrGriven sta ccs tected Noes cae ees ahead adhe ee aa ae bchoam eect 45 592 SOU WG VV ONS 2 oa oar tas ce cts tense cracks tas ace Sasa piascigs Seats facade sade en dseus Sac seee ae aac eos 45 5 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series ccc ceececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees 46 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series cc ceccceeeeeeeeeeees 47 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability cccccccccccsescceceeceseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeseesessaeeeseueeesaeeees 48 5 6 1 Other peripheral equipment applicability 2 0 0 0 ccc cccceeceececeeceeeeecesseeesecesseaeesseaeesseaeessaaeeessaes 48 6 Examination of System Configuration 49 6 1 Configuration Ora Whole SYSIOM cite deserchencicateti de tetent receded teaches delet acetal leeeel enh taled eve deea rts 49 6 1 1 Expansion board connector conversion adapter memory cassette system configuration 49 6 1 2 Special adapter system CONFIQUIATION ccsecccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseeessaeneeeeeeas 50 7 Installation In Enclosure 51 ft WIASCAMAUIOM OCAUOWM sonens ana cheeses eed bien a a e Soa tame aa 53 7 1 1 Installation location in CNCIOSULE cccccecccceccceeeeceececeneeceeeecsucecueesauessaeessaeessueessgeessesessasessaeess 53 TANEZ SPACE INVCMCIOSUNG wise Moccasin ac cet a
135. cial data register System Information Description MAA Request edit of specified device monitor MA A 1 Edition completion response of specified device monitor Operation of MA A ON Enables the device editing function OFF Disables the device editing function When the edition request turns ON bit devices Y M and S can be forcibly turned ON or OFF and the current value set value of word devices D T and C can be edited The operation is same as the test mode operation of monitor test Refer to Subsection 16 9 1 to 16 5 6 for operation of monitor test Operation of MA A 1 Turns ON after completion of a test operation for a specified device monitor or when the OK or ESC button operated To turn OFF the request edit of a specified device monitor is turned off or it is turned off in the user s program 172 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 Specified Device Monitor Function Program example w In this program example the counter C10 is displayed and current value set value edit data change is T enabled when the OK button is pressed gt System information is assigned from D130 to D134 and from M400 to M414 a veers FNC 12 K130 D8158 System information system No 1 1 2 MOV is set at D130 to D134 O FNC 12 System information system No 2 2 Peer nee is set at M400 to M414 z FNC 12 K6 D130 Sets the device type to Count
136. cified device monitor function the following operations occur In the example below TO T10 and T30 are specified in the OUT instruction Cto x Cio x C730 5 Operation Description Operation 1 Displays T10 if T1 to T9 is specified Displays the next device number larger than the specified device Operation 2 Displays T30 if T11 to T29 is specified number Operation 3 Displays T30 if T31 or more is specified Displays T30 if the device range is exceeded e When the OUT instruction for any timer T or counter C does not exist in the program while a timer T or counter C is monitored in the specified device monitor function a horizontal dotted line is displayed A horizontal dotted line is displayed also for timers and counters used as operands of applied instructions A horizontal dotted line is displayed 16 9 2 Program example In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to timer T Sets the device No to T20 System information is assigned from D130 to D134 M8002 FNC 12 ARE System information system No 1 is set at D130 to D134 Display command input Sets the device type to Timer Sets the device No to T20 169 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi OOO on 5 a L m a D 5 n O 5 NaS S X4
137. combination of each product and the available connection positions IA e 1st position An expansion board connector conversion adapter display module or memory cassette can 57 be connected o e 2nd position A display module or memory cassette can be connected Connect a connector conversion adapter to the 1st position of the BD slot The FX3S 5DM or uogejesu i FX3G EEPROM 32L can be connected to the 2nd position 22 25 5 lt BD 2nd position FX3S 5DM FX3G EEPROM 32L Bum induy Q pue uonevedaiy CO When the 1st position is used by BD 1st position an expansion board or connector conversion adapter e FX3G 4EX BD e FX3G 2EYT BD the FX3G EEPROM 32L can be e FX3G 232 BD e FX3G 422 BD 1 0 connected to the 2nd position e FX3G 485 BD e FX3G 485 BD RJ e FX3G 2AD BD e FX3G 1DA BD Ja e FX3G 8AV BD e FX3s 5DM ah e FX3G EEPROM 32L a8 Q 49 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 6 1 2 Restrictions in the use of the FX3G 422 BD When connecting a device such as GOT which consumes an internal 5 V DC to each of the RS 422 port built in the main unit and the FX3G 422 BD at the same time avoid continuous use of either device If both devices are used continuously their life may be shortened due to heat generation lt Configuration example gt RS 422 p
138. contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 1 2 3 Averaging time setting error b5 2 a Description of error E The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 2 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 a b Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel 1 3 ss ee cF Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q Howay N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq 107 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 Output Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input o
139. conversion adapter as shown in the oo right figure Bo 9 Slide the special adapter connecting 2 hooks A in the right figure of the Z connector conversion adapter to 3 secure the special adapter B in the right figure 10 Ot 61 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Application of labels 7 6 Application of labels The label is packed together with the expansion board FX3G 485 BD FX3G 485 BD RJ FX3G 8AV BD Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference 7 6 1 Application of Station No label FX3G 485 BD The station No label is packed together with the FX3G 485 BD Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference as shown in the figure below VY I RRBIAIL Network Station No JY818D63001A Station 6 s 6 Station 8 S 8 Station 9 S 9 When the memory cassette When the memory cassette is not used together is used together 7 6 2 Application of Station No label FX3G 485 BD RJ The station No label is packed together with the FX3G 485 BD RuJ Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference as shown in the figure below YY IARSINIL Network Station No JY818D63001A Station 6 5 6 Station 9 5 9 when the memory cassette when the memory cassette is not used together is used together 62 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers
140. ctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual OL Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual a Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires c3 Do not solder plate the electric wire ends S Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed A a q Q op o E n 2 O O ena lt 98 ox Bui induy i uH s13 UN09 peeds 75 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 1 Before Starting Input Wiring 9 1 Before Starting Input Wiring 9 1 1 Sink and source input The input terminals X of the main unit are common to sink source input of 24 V DC internal power 1 Differences between the sink input circuit and the source input circuit e Sink input common Sink input means a DC input signal with current flow from the input X terminal When a sensor with a transistor output is connected NPN open collector transistor output can be used e Source input common Source input means a DC input signal with current flow into the input X terminal When a sensor with a transistor output is connected PNP open collector transistor output can be used 2 Method of swi
141. cuit for inductive loads SFD n When an inductive load is connected connect a diode See Sink output type O p Q _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO for commutation in parallel with the load as necessary Inductive The diode must comply with the following specifications Item Guide Fuse lt Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage t Forward current Load current or more MO Main unit Source output type Inductive Yo00 Fuse V0 Main unit a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q 3 Interlock 17 For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where _ a Sink output type amp amp a hazardous condition could result if switched ON p S simultaneously an external interlock should be provided Limitof aie for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to normal rotation Interlock Normal the right rotation Reverse Limit of PLC output rotation reverse rotation element E Source output type Ss J Limit of S normal rotation Interlock Normal z rotation Reverse rotation Limit of PLC output reverse rotation element S17 UORONASU gJ s n d jeioeds sj pow penuljucosiq 115 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 4 Example of external wiring 1 Transistor output Sink 100 to 240 V AC
142. current e Sink output type e Source output type Main unit Dummy resistance il resistance Fuse Load Fuse Load 6 Output current The maximum resistance loads for the main unit is shown in the following table The ON voltage of the output transistor is approx 1 5 V When driving a semiconductor element carefully check the input voltage characteristics of the applied element Output current Limitation The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value 0 5 A point 1 point common 0 5 A or less 4 points common 0 8 A or less 7 Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA or less 114 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type 12 2 3 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the fusell total rated fuse capacity sy c z 5 gt 5 a Ca Sink output type Yo00 COMO Main unit Source output type Yo00 VO Main unit Bunny yndino ZA Jo buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja TEn OD a 2 Contact protection cir
143. d and stopped with individual RUN and STOP pushbutton switches For this operation a Sequence program using M8035 to M8037 is necessary For details refer to Operations of Special Devices in Programming Manual General purpose input terminal RUN WA specified as RUN input by parameter S S x000 x001 x002 RUN STOP _ General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter S S X000 X001 x002 Main unit Source input RUN STOP _ General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter nanan 3 Starting and stopping by remote control from programming tool The programming tool has a function to forcibly start and stop the PLC by remote control remote RUN STOP function However when power is reapplied the remote RUN STOP function is disabled The RUN STOP status is then determined by the RUN STOP switch or RUN terminal For details on the start and stop procedures with remote control from programming tool refer to Paragraph 2 of Subsection 14 2 2 128 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods z 5 1 When the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose RUN terminal are used D without remote running stopping operation from the programming tool E The RUN STOP
144. d must be unchecked r Leave this unchecked Print Window Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel 42 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 5 Cautions on write during RUN UOI ONPO U Write during RUN program changes during RUN is available in the FX3s PLC when GX Works2 is used However list programs and SFC programs cannot be written during RUN When programming software not supporting the FX3s PLC is used write during RUN is available within the function range available in both the FX3s PLC and the PLC selected as the alternative model Refer to the manual of the used programming software for the operations NO Um for and cautions on write during RUN ae Cautions on write during RUN P o Q Item Caution Program memories which can be written in Built in EEPROM and optional memory cassette whose write protect switch is set to 3 RUN mode OFF Number of program steps which can be written 256 steps or less after edition addition deletion F for circuit change in RUN mode including NOP immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit a OQ e Circuit blocks in which labels P and are added deleted or changed in edited circuits o Circuit blocks which cannot be written in RUN Circuit blocks in which 1 ms timers T63 to T131 are added in ed
145. d only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3S PLC and the FX1N PLC For applicable models refer to the GOT manual For connection using the 2 port interface function refer to Section 5 5 The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3S PLC and the FX1N PLC For supported models and device ranges refer to the FX 10DM USER S MANUAL Manual No JY992D86401 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System UOI ONPO U 6 Examination of System Configuration NO 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System The configuration of a whole system is shown below as an example SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Configuration of a whole system OO Memory cassette Expansion boards O ee _ 3 E g 2 z Connector conversion adapter Main unit 8 iq Q 02 Qi owg DD 7o no gt a 215 2 6 1 1 Expansion board connector conversion adapter memory cassette system configuration One expansion board or connector conversion adapter and one memory cassette can be connected The figure below shows the
146. de ae ioges eae hee 53 7 2 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure ccccsecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseueesseeeeseneesaeeeess 54 7 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Ralll ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 54 7 051 Preparation for IMStalll Atl OM see ese ctsxcca dee sesneneed donee cosesndencsadetsdceeceeek os lt tadace Raewsganeasi E 54 1 022 MSTAllallOMGr main CM resis ede ce UG oo cd enc NG aco hee oe totes a Seat ond ses ieend enter aedesu teense rien 55 79 3 Removalof MAIN UNI soceri e r a E E a A 56 7 4 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 screws cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeseaeeeeeeas 57 1 4 1 Hole pitches for direct MOUNTING cimain a aaaea a ede ete aa 57 7 4 2 Example of mounting hole pitChes cc cccccccccceececenececeeeeeceee cesses ceeseeceeseeeeeseueeessueeesseeeesseeeesaes 58 AS InStallavion OF Mall Unesa eee a ee ee Se eee 58 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeneeeeneas 58 7 5 1 Connection Of extension GEVICES cccccccceccecseececeeeceeaeeceeaeeceeseeceeseeeeeseeecesauecesaeecessaueessuaaeeeesaes 58 7 5 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion DOAIC ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 59 7 5 3 Connecting method B connection of connector conversion adaptel c cccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeesaaes 60 7 5 4 Co
147. dix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and name Content of register N N Network setting D18170 to 018172 DET pT pp Dall Index register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 182 Das Dau pee Dau par Dau tas pps Dall ppt 08193 pps Dam D18196 10 D199 Correspond ing special device M8038 Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device N N Network monitoring 08200 D 8201 Current link scan time D 8202 Maximum link scan time D 8203 Number of communication error at master station D 8204 Number of communication error at slave station No 1 D 8205 Number of communication error at slave station No 2 D 8206 Number of communication error at slave station No 3 D 8207 Number of communication error at slave station No 4 D 8208 Number of communication error at slave station No 5 D 8209 Number of communication error at slave station No 6 D 8210 Number of communication error at slave station No 7 M8183 to icati M8191 D 8211 Code of communication error at master station D 8212 Code of communication error at slave station No 1 Code of communication error at Dga slave station No 2 D 8214 Code of communication error at slave station No 3 Code of communication error at 99219 slave station No 4 D 8216 Code of communication error at slave station No 5 Code of communication error at RIBAL slave station No 6 D 8218 Code of communication erro
148. duct name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS sessaccisdacieviocaatvcedicnenctvwsen coisa cndeaceatadaaiesactadvaaiaraadeaugensicaiascesadiaceiys 1 Standards sorso a Teh cuca A ee Gk lek oc aan ne oi 10 Certification of UL cUL Standards c cece cccccccsscecesseeceececeeeeceueeceeeeeceaeeeeacessaeessaueessueeesanseesaases 10 Compliance with EC directive CE Marking cccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeessenseeeaaeeeess 10 Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive ccccccsecccceeececeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseueeesaneeeeaneees 10 Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive cccccccccccceecceceeeeeceseeeceeeceeseeeeeseeeeesseeeessaeeeeseeeees 11 Caution for compliance with EC Directive ccccccccccsecccceesceceeeeeceeeeesaeecesseeeeesseeeesseeeessugeeesaaeeeesaaaees 12 1 Introduction 13 1 1 I FOGUCTIONOR Manuals srren 13 1 1 1 Classification of major components in this MANUA ccccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaanes 13 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual ccccceeeeeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeeeseeeeeeseaees 14 Tlo LISUOM manual Siers a a soa area eee aE Ta 15 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manu
149. e Contact area depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath Select the electric Crimp area wire referring to the outline drawing B 1 8 mm lt Reference gt 0 32 Manufacturer Caulking tool 61 1 14 mm 0 56 3 Phoenix Contact Co Ltd AI 0 5 8WH ciao or CRIMPFOX 6T F 3 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 4 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 4 Tool For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve With Note straight tip If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be 0 4mm 25mm able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in 0 02 0 1 the table above use the following screwdriver or appropriate replacement HE IK grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 lt Reference gt Manufacturer Model name Phoenix Contact Co Ltd SZS 0 4x2 5 68 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 8 2 3 Grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ The grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ is a terminal blocks for Europe 1 Applicable cables Electric wire size AWG 20 to 16 2 Treatment of electric wire ends e When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
150. e Display and Setting 16 6 Time Display and Setting Time setting Display and setting can be performed for the current time Time display Year month day hour and minute are displayed when the power is turned ON 1 Press and hold the OK button for 2 seconds or more to make data blink 2 Use the buttons to change the blinking data as desired 3 Press the OK button to determine the input Set year month day hour and minute in this order When the OK button is pressed at minute set up the setting operation will be completed Press the ESC button to return to the previous set item While the year data is blinking however pressing the ESC button cancels the previous time setting and returns to the time display screen 16 7 Error Display PLC errors and keyword error are displayed Error display When an error occurs in the PLC the error step No and error code are displayed One of the following errors is displayed when it occurs PLC hardware error Parameter error Syntax Error Circuit error Whether or not operation errors etc are to be displayed can be selected from the program Refer to Subsection 14 6 3 for error code Refer to Section 16 12 for error display valid invalid Press an operation button on the display module while an error is displayed to return to the screen displayed before the error display screen Display Content 1 Error step No 2 Erro
151. e correctly set according to e 6307 e N N network parallel link MODBUS communication etc 1 7 Check programs according to applications ee Remote maintenance oz 6309 Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the 3 F 4 gt 6312 Continues Parallel link character error AT commands operation e Wiring 6313 Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct wiring 6314 Parallel link format error 0320 A 6321 MODBUS communication error o O When the memory cassette is used check whether it is S 8 mounted correctly 6330 Memory access error If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used Qe something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult SP your local Mitsubishi Electric representative z 6340 Special adapter connection error Check connection of the special adapter B A 2 2 ie e sj pow penuljuoosiq 135 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Parameter error M8064 D8064 Contents of error Action 6401 Program sum check error 6402 Memory capacity setting error STOP the PLC and correctly set the parameters 6404 Comment area setting error 6405 File register area setting error Stops e STOP the PLC and correctly set th
152. e error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Subsection 11 3 7 3 Program check Check the following items for the program e Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program 4 Error status check If an error occurs in the PLC the corresponding bit will turn on The bit which is turned ON due to the error status is held ON until overwritten to OFF by the program or the power is cycled Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b2 Unused b3 Unused b4 EEPROM error b5 Averaging time setting error common ch1 and ch2 b6 to b15 Unused To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Over scale detection bO b1 a Description of error The input analog value voltage value is outside the specified range The input voltage value is over the specified upper limit of 10 2 V b Remedy Check that the input analog value is within the specified range Also check the wiring 106 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 2 EEPROM error b4 oo a Description of error The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read a out properly or has been destroyed a b Remedy Please
153. e for channel 2 FNC 12 Stores the A D converted Ss D100 gS Beene vol channel 1 digital data into D100 c oQ St FNC 12 D8271 D101 Stores the A D converted T MOV channel 2 digital data into D101 Ja 11 3 9 Changing of input characteristics SE e S The input characteristics can be changed using a sequence program in the PLC TE 52 Example Changing of input characteristics go This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 100 to 500 when the voltage input is 1 to 5 V to digital output range of O to 10000 _ Qi 1 Input characteristics E S53 Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed 5 Mm gt product specifications Y axis T SOO 10000 pan i g J O i 5 Oa E a2 D Sa 16 A UDa FJ BO OEE Fo SS aga no e g 1000 7 17 1 I 1 x 0 14v 5 V gt 10 ol100 1v 500 5 v oz Analog input gt 3 Digital value actually obtained as by A D conversion 2 Example of program For example create the following program to change the digital input data MISY FNC 12 Doaa Sets the averaging scaling to 1 for z oO Normally ON MOV the channel 1 data 7 M8000 S FNC 12 pa270 D110 8 Normally ON MOV FNC230 FNC237 Check to make sure the digital value D110 K100 D110 K500 CM100 _ D110 is in range M100 FNC 21 D110 K100 D111 FNC 22 Calculation for changing input D111 K10000 D1
154. e index register Z0 Se D S FNC 40 M400 to M414 storing the system 2 ZRST Me Ki information are reset FNC 12 MOV D140 T i NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q FNC 12 K5 D141 Ma Transfers the timer device numbers to D140 to D143 4 T i OF FNC 12 3 When the button is pressed M406 M406 M405 FNC 24 storing the system information turns ON t The INC instruction increases the current value of ZO by 1 M405 M406 FNC 25 When the button is pressed M405 T storing the system information turns ON S The DEC instruction decreases 5 M8000 the current value of ZO by 1 The device number to be displayed is specified its Nov The device number is specified FNC224 ENC 12 within the allowable range S17 UORONJSU gJ saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuoosiq 171 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 Specified Device Monitor Function 16 9 5 Specified device editing function Devices displayed in the specified device monitor function can be edited 1 System signal 1 4 Special data register System Information Description DDD O Device type to be displayed D8158 KOO 7 DOU 1 Device No to be displayed l Maximum or minimum value of the corresponding device if the device number is set outside the allowable range Refer to Subsection 16 9 1 for system signal 1 2 System signal 2 D8159 K A A 1 Spe
155. e main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly Please wire using the correct polarity Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should f
156. e output contact Y at the same time when the current values of high speed counters change 2 Use of Comparison instruction for high speed counters HSCS instruction HSCR instruction HSZ instruction Comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS instruction HSCR instruction and HSZ instruction perform comparison and output the comparison results with the relevant high speed counting operation These instructions have limitations on the number of simultaneously driven instructions as shown in the following table When the output relay Y has been designated for comparison results the ON OFF status of the output is affected directly until the END instruction output is refreshed When the PLC is a relay output type a mechanical delay in operation approx 10 ms is caused Therefore it is best to use a transistor output type PLC Applied instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time HSCS instruction HSCR instruction 6 instructions HSZ instruction 1 The overall frequency changes when the HSCS instruction HSCR instruction or HSZ instruction is used For details on the overall frequency refer to Section 10 7 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 10 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency UOI ONPO U 1 Response frequency and overall frequency When any of the following
157. e special parameters 6420 Ps Special parameter sum check error e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and operation then turn ON the power e Check the contents of the special parameter error code D8489 confirm troubleshooting for special adapters 6421 Special parameters setting error special blocks and set special parameters correctly e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON the power Syntax error M8065 D8065 6501 Incorrect combination of instruction device symbol and device number e No setting value after OUT T or OUT C 6503 aye eee e Insufficient number of operands for an applied instruction e Same label number is used more than once Pave Stops S PRAMS Inte Op EIN pu Or NIJN EPRE Counter INPUR IS USGE During programming each instruction is checked If a syntax more than once i operation error is detected modify the instruction correctly 6505 Device number is out of allowed range 6506 Invalid instruction 6507 Invalid label number P 6508 Invalid interrupt input I 6510 MC nesting number error Circuit error M8066 D8066 6610 LD LDI is continuously used 9 times or more 6611 More ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 6612 Less ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 6613 MPS is continuously used 12 times or more 6614 No MPS instruction 6615 No MPP instruction This error occurs when a combination of instructions is Stops No col
158. eaas 200 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Appendix B Instruction List 201 ADDeNCIXB 1 Basic NISIUCIIOINS ceaiorie a a anal adie an Adeesad dicen 201 Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions ccccccccecccececeseceeeceueecueeceeecseeceuseeeessaeesaeeseeesaens 201 Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Numbet cccc0ee 202 Appendix C Discontinued models 205 Warranty gee ee nD a a ener eae ee 207 Revised HIStOIy onia a etd oot ei see E E eee eene se 208 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Standards Certification of UL cUL standards FX3S series main units FX3s series interface adapter and FX3U series special adapters supporting UL cUL standards are as follows UL cUL file number E95239 Models MELSEC FX3s FX3uU series manufactured FX3S MR ES FX3S MT ES FX3S x MT ESS FX3S MR DS FX3S MT DS FX3S x MT DSS Where indicates 10 14 20 30 FX3S 30MR ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ES 2AD FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD FX3S CNV ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Compliance with EC directive CE Marking This note does not guarantee that an entire mechanical module produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with the
159. ear and month of production The year and month of production of the main unit is indicated zA For details on the year and month of production refer to Subsection 5 1 1 5 9 Model name abbreviation The model name of the main unit is indicated Check the nameplate on the right side for the model name 10 DIN rail mounting hooks The main unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 8 UD Sga ago a 38 lt 5 Q 5 O a i uH s13 UN0N peeds 21 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts When the top covers are open 1 2 FX3s 30MR ES a V COM 7 1 Optional equipment connector 2 RUN STOP switch 3 Variable analog potentiometers except FX3S 30ML ELJ 2AD 4 Analog input terminal block only FX3S 30MLJ EL 2AD 5 Peripheral device connecting connector USB 6 Peripheral device connecting connector RS 422 7 Optional equipment connecting screw holes 2 places These holes are designed to secure the expansion board display module and memory cassette with screws To stop writing batch of the sequence program or operation set the switch to STOP slide it downward To start operation run the machine set it to RUN slide it upward Two variable analog potentio
160. ect an appropriate cable while Crimp area referring to the external view E v 6mm lt Reference gt 7 to 2 5 mm 0 23 2 Manufacturer Model Caulking tool 0 07 to 0 09 10 5 to 12 mm 0 41 to 0 47 Al 0 25 6BU AWG24 X Phoenix Contact Co Ltd AI 0 34 6TQ AWG22 SRIMPEOSG x or CRIMPFOX 6T F 2 Al 0 5 6WH AWG20 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 Tool For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver The head having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right should be Caution straight 0 4 mm 2 5mm able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in de iP a wes the table above use the following screwdriver or appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 lt Reference gt Manufacturer Model name Phoenix Contact Co Ltd SZS 0 4 2 5 102 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 5 Terminal layout Terminal layout is arranged as follows Bojeuy ul yIng e e e channel 1 analog input e e e channel 2 analog input 1 2 e e e COM terminal S z ss a2 as 9 VO IO chO O represents the channel number Ja 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from othe
161. ed as the input data The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers Special data register Description D8274 Averaging time for channel 1 D8275 Averaging time for channel 2 Cautions regarding averaging time setting e Ifthe averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data is stored to the special data register e Ifthe averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095 the average value will be calculated to conform to the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register e After turning the PLC power on the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data items reaches the set averaging time After this the average data will be stored e Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range an error signal will be output e Ifthe averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 For a detailed description of the error refer to Subsection 11 3 10 Error status If an error is detected in the PLC the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Special data register Descr
162. eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeaes 106 12 Output Wiring Procedures 108 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type cccccceccccseeceeceeseeeceeeeeeceeeeeseeueeessegeeessseeesssseeeses 110 12 1 1 Product life of relay contacts 0 0 cece ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeessaeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeaaeeeeeseniieeeeeesaas 110 V2 122 Handling of relay OuUlOUl risc ciate ease eats Ee ee ei ae 110 12 1 3 External wiring precautions ccccccccsesccecesscecesseeeseuceeseuececseuseeseueceseuacessegeesseaseesseaeeessagsensas 111 12 14 Example of extemal Wiring cscitectadestceersteteGingees a Aaaa aa eva hades 112 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink SOurce Type cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeens 113 12 2 1 Transistor Output SINK and Source sha2esian secede ees baec be ee cd sieie Sal nc ah eee wis baad ease eect 113 122 2 Handingor transistor OULU sxc 2t eeu aaa a E E a ranted ee 113 1223 Extemalwiing PRE CAUUOINS arreirar a a A R A aa biae 115 12 2 4 Example of external wiring ice cckesinesignateb iaaeccaitse dew aus actidineniouecegesneiiaeadcagsdeaidedsaxdced ecadenceaento eden 116 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 118 13 1 Notes about Examples OW INN Gareca aesete saint ienaasnad A AEA 119 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instruction FNC 72 BIN Instruction FNC 19 ccceeeceessseeeeeeeeeeenens 120 13 2 1 When DSW instruction FNC 72 iS used cceeeccccsceeceecceeeeeecceaaeeees
163. eeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeseeeesseeeseeeeesaeeeees 72 8 5 Examples of External Wiring DC power type ccccccecccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeetaeeeas 73 9 Input Wiring Procedures 74 91 Berre Staring INDUL Wiring eisena ienaa E a a a E 76 1 SK AIG SOUL CO MV OUI sere sa enaa a ea doce daveducdustbicdwatsasacedia tedden EEEE EAE iT 76 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and Source input tyPe cee ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeecaeeeeesaueseeseaeeesaaeeeesaaeeessaases 77 9 2 1 Handling Of 24 VDC Input wicca at Renate ee ee ie ee ee 77 9 2 2 Instructions for connecting input CEVICES ccccccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeessaeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesseaneeeeeeas 78 9 2 3 Examples of external wiring AC power tye cccccccecccceeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesaeeesanes 80 9 2 4 Examples of external wiring DC power type cccccccecccceeeceeceeceeseeeeeseeceeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesaaes 81 9 3 Input Interruption IOOE 16150 aranean a esi eentegiene Gace 82 9 3 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration cccccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 82 9 3 2 Cautions for input interruption ecses fo seeehccees eieceteeevvedacaddcbegs decdaae se aeceaceads nua datecdaaue a nesteeedsetedain eee 82 9 3 3 Exampl es of external WINING ssion inean e deadensdeiududie vid riai a a s 83 9 4 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 0annnannoaann0annnannannnannonnnonnrornnrnrnnernrrnnrrnnrrnnrrrnr
164. eesaaaeeeeeseneeeeesaeas 133 146 2 Representation Of errors ewer ee ee ena al eles kay N E een boeeies 134 14 6 3 Error Code List amd ACU ON mreana aa aa a a eaaa aa adi 135 WE Troubleshooting serre T E E E A E O 140 147 1 TOUIDULGOES NOL OMe ale okena a a eae ee baee 140 14 7 2 24 V DC input does not operate ccc cccccceeccceeeceeceececeeececeeeeeeceecesseaaeessaacesseeesseaeessageeesanes 140 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword xii oohet8 da ele eee edeceadhabacesi anh cadiedaiiedlaileale 141 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 142 19 T SC ANC A COS s e a a E 142 TS LT EX Ua AD ADP ana E AAA O 142 des Bd Wear S TADA ADR a a N a a Tere ee rerors 142 LS EK SUE OA ADP n a a a a R R T 143 1TA FA SUAD P EHWFADP ainan A 143 1921207 XK VAAD PNK ADP a a a vena E a r a sated atone hiaatee ans 143 AAO SU A TC ADR e e a a a a a A a mee 144 1 520 FAAIU 232ADP EMB rania O r E A E E 144 15 18 FXSUASSADP MB Jerinin a aa a aao 145 152159 EX SUENEF ADP ninne aa aa aa A eee 145 152 EXPANSION BOATA ean paces hee cere et a eerste ee tae eee 146 dhe as Wie CEE an De en ee nee eee eee ee ee ne ett Seen eee 146 12 OFA G EY T BD chap seas eaten A a asters ametualel 146 1523F X9IG23 BD parnana a a a coach a nan a 147 15 24 FAJG422 BD errena n a a a E de aca 147 1520 FASC 485 BD raae a a a a EA AR EREKE ARS 148 15 20 PAGAL BDR J aiaa a a cantons a Sis taaheonannl maeteetsin
165. eeuseeesaueasesssaeeeessaaeeeseaes 120 13 2 2 When BIN instruction FNC 19 iS USEd ccccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeesaaas 121 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instruction FNC 52 cccccccccccceccecseceeeeeeceecesaeeeeseeesseeeeseeeesaeeeeseeeesaeeeeeas 122 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instruction FNC 74 BCD Instruction FNC 18 123 13 4 1 When SEGL instruction FNC 74 iS used ccccccccssseeeceeeeeeeecaeeseecceeseceesaaaeeeeseaesesseageeeeseas 123 13 4 2 When BCD instruction FNC 18 iS used ce cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeesaneeeeeesaaeeseesaeeseeeeaeas 124 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 125 14 Preparation fOr TestODPEralON cns a te aanawneiesaa meter yene Dhaai aah eee 126 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF cccccceeecccessceceeeceeseeceseeececseceseeseeeseeeceseecesaueeesensgees 126 14 1 2 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector RS 422 0 0 eecccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeans 126 14 1 3 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector USB ccccceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 127 14 1 4 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped ccccecceeeeeeeeee ees 127 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON cccccccccseececeeeeeeeecesaeececeecessueeeseeeesseeeeseaees 128 14 2 1 Methods of running ANd stopping c
166. endix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8289 and D8280 to D8289 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8289 and D8280 to D8289 When analog special adapters are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column For details refer to the Analog Control Edition Appendix A 4 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 Operation and function Number M 8280 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8281 Input mode switching Ch2 ae Noted ee es M 8286 Output hold mode cancel nar O or m ee O e a w e pe a eE Operation and function M 8280 Temperature unit selection M 8281 Input sensor selection 199 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q Kiowsyy I Q las N ep D D 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d jeloeds sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8289 and D8280 to D8289 Appendix A 4 2 Special data registers D8280 to D8289 Operation and function FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP
167. er 1 3 MOV es Oo F cF ma K10 D131 Sets the device number to C10 D Ja FNC 40 M400 M414 M400 to M414 storing the system DS ZRST information are reset SDB Sem Input for counting the counter B 5 M407 When the OK button MAA 7 M407 is pressed SET M400 the edit request MAA M400 turns ON _ Qi The SET instruction is used so that the edit request ec remains ON even if the OK button is released S a O lt g O m gt lt mr 49 w O When the OK button for edit completion or ESC NAR RST M400 button is pressed the PLC turns ON the edit completion response MAA 1 M401 M400 is reset and the edit is completed Cautions on using the edit function Was SEx4 ginpoy Aejdsig It is necessary to make valid the specified device monitor function before using the specified device editor function When the and buttons are used for scrolling the device number the device number scroll program is 1 T activated if the current value or set value is increased or decreased during editing oz In such a combination it is necessary to set the following interlock 3 tS Edit request input MAA 1 Editing program Edit completion response Es button a Qe idee raid adie aa FNC 24 83 INC button Device number scroll program B sid ra ie FNC 25 a DEC 5 Ey N oOo S Set the interlock so that scroll is disabled while the edit request is valid
168. er s Manual Hardware Edition 4 2 Power Supply Specifications 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test Perform dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test at the following voltage between each terminals and the main unit ground terminal Terminal Dielectric strength Remark resistance Terminals of main unit Between power supply terminal AC power and 1 5 kV AC for 1 min ground terminal Between power supply terminal DC power and ground terminal Between input terminal 24 V DC and ground terminal 500 V AC for 1 min 5 MQ or more by 500 V DC megger Between output terminal relay and ground 1 5 kV AC for 1 min terminal Between output terminal transistor and ground 500 V AC for 1 min terminal Main unit analog input terminal and ground 3 terminal Not allowed Not allowed Terminals of expansion boards special adapters Since the expansion board and the main Between terminal of expansion board except unit CPU are not insulated it is not FX3G 4EX BD and FX3G 2EYT BD and ground Not allowed Not allowed allowed to perform the dielectric withstand terminal voltage test and insulation resistance test between them Between FX3G 4EX BD input terminal 24 V DC and ground terminal Between FX3G 2EYT BD output terminal 5 MQ or more b transistor and ground d POON AS oe mn 500 V DC nee Between terminal of special adapter and ground terminal
169. er supply are not wired correctly 4 Please wire using the correct polarity a Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual 8 If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product a When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Qi Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product OUs Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal lt 5 a The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual 8 D S Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions 6 Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfun
170. erify operation of the product and check for damage of the mounting part etc 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt sj pow penuljucosiq 125 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF Incorrect connection of the power supply terminal contact of the DC input wire and power supply wire or short circuiting of output wires may result in serious damage Before applying power check that the power supply and ground terminals are connected correctly and input output devices are wired properly The dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance test of the PLC should be measured in accordance with the following procedures 1 Remove all input output wires and power supply wires from the PLC 2 Connect a crossing wire to each of the PLC terminals power supply terminal input terminals and output terminals except the ground terminal For the dielectric withstand voltage test of each terminal refer to the generic specifications for the product refer to Section 4 1 3 Measure the dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance between each terminal and the ground terminal Dielectric withstand voltage 1 5 kV AC or 500 V for 1min The terminals vary in dielectric withstand vo
171. ernnernnernnrrnnrrnnnnnnne 84 9 4 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals ccee 84 GAZ Camions TOr pue Cate Ni oea canoe a E 84 943 EXalmples Of external WIN Gcsnnonaae a a eo ade el NE 85 10 Use of High speed Counters 86 TO Ms SL INS a a E R 86 10 2 Types of Counting and Operations ccccccccccseeeccceesceeceuececceeceesaueseessaueeessaeeeeseesessesseeeesaaes 86 102 1 Types and NputSONaAlNTON S sa E a A a ode me suecdp sacs 86 10 2 2 High speed counter device notations ccccccccsseccccsececceececsessceceueeensscecsuseesseueessegeeensueesseaess 86 10 2 3 Cautions in connecting mating device c cc ceecccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeeeessanseeeensaees 86 10 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions cccccccccecccceececeeecececeseeeeceecesseeceseueessaeeesssesseeeeaaes 87 10 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers cccccecccseeceeeeeeeceeceteeeeeseeesseeeesaeeeseaeeeeenes 88 IOA TANCIA DE ra a a a a A aE 88 10 4 2 Restriction of redundant use of input NUMDESS ccc cece ceeecceceeeeeeaeeeeceeeeeesescesseeeeseeseessaeeenes 88 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters ccccccseececceececceeeeecceescecceeeceecseseeessaseeessaueesseeeesseseeesssages 89 105 1 1 phas e ECOUNIN PUT sorn aA AE E T E 89 105 2 i phase 2 co untinput ssie a a a a a a 90 103 3 2Z DNaSeZ COUNE INGU sos TE A bil siasiee Set
172. es 37 Fe 2 FA SOV Sl Baa are sate cates So snes ac croc ae Aaatie eee ea te sed same seese E S 38 74 ee TaD eo 8 Ba aae ee ee neon eee ee ee nee ee ee eee 38 LLA SE KOS 2 OMEN eoan e e ented hs aar louse denaventec atu Qesehas A ATEENAN 39 FO FAIS B DI Pree eer re ee an ce ee a ee ere 39 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 40 9 1 Versi n AMMORMAUOM sinn eaa aa aE AE EE A a R EAA EA 40 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial number check Method ccccccceecceceeceeceeececeeeeeceeceseecesseeeessaesessaeeessaees 40 gA Version Check Methods T ainia T E a a bce sereuada neiteds 41 5 To VCNSIOMN upgrade NISTO V ns a a a a a E 41 5 2 Programming TOOrAPplica Dilly ates ete ete satel ela ache etek ela oa cha take teehee atl 41 5 2 1 Applicable versions Of programming tOOl ccccccceeeccceeeecceeeeeceeeeeeseeseeseeeeeseeeeeseeeceeseeeeeseeeenenes 41 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not APpliCAable cc ececcccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaees 41 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tools ccccceeceeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeas 42 5 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter 42 5 2 5 Cautions on write during RUN cccceccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseaeeeseaseeeessaaeeeeeeeeeas 43 5 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Polt ccc ccccccssseee
173. f 1 phase counters Sum of used frequency of 2 phase counters 6 3 Example of calculation 92 Example 1 as When HSCS instruction HSCR instruction or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to a positioning DRVI instruction YOOO and DRVA instruction Y001 are used Overall frequency 200 kHz 2 axes x 40 kHz 120 kHz lt High speed counter No gt lt Contents of use gt T C235 1 phase 1 count input 50 KHz is input F C236 1 phase 1 count input 50 kHz is input a C237 1 phase 1 count input 10 KHz is input S C253 2 phase 2 count input 5 kHz is input Total 115 k Hz lt 120 kHz Overall frequency Example 2 8 When HSCS instruction HSCR instruction or HSZ instruction is used and instructions related to positioning T DRVI instruction Y000 is used ee E Overall frequency 60 kHz 1 axis x 5 kHz 55 kHz 5 5 lt High speed counter No gt lt Contents of use gt C237 1 phase 1 count input 10 KHz is input C253 2 phase 2 count input 5 kHz is input 9 Total 15 k Hz lt 55 kHz Overall frequency 3 93 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 10 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 10 8 1 1 phase 1 input C235 to C245 The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C235 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the coun
174. f FNC Number 2 FNC No Mnemonic Function FNC No Mnemonic Function External FX Device External Device 80 Serial Communication 170 GRY Decimal to Gray Code Conversion a 81 PRUN Parallel Run Octal Mode 171 GBIN Gray Code to Decimal Conversion 82 ASCI Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 172 1 2 83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 173 ea O 85 VRRD Volume read 175 o z 86 VRSC Volume scale 176 a 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 177 L 88 PID PID Control Loop 7 oo 13 Floating Point Data Comparison o2 O 110 ECMP Floating Point Compare 220 to 223 111 roe 224 Load Compare 112 EMOV Floating Point Move 225 LD gt Load Compare S1 gt S2 mono pare SU GD 14 120 EADD Floating Point Addition 226 Load Compare lt Je 0 121 ESUB Floating Point Subtraction 227 ma z ao esas ners 122 EMUL Floating Point Multiplication 228 bead Compate Sy F 3 123 EDIV Floating Point Division 5 si 229 Load Compare Z z onp ESQR Floating Point Square Root 232 AND Compare Z 2 p 49 E 233 AND gt AND C gt D 129 INT Floating Point to Integer Conversion AND gt AAPA 5 Positioning Control 234 AND Compare lt 150 DSZR DOG Search Zero Return 235 1 6 T2 a o 237 AND lt AND Compare SD lt D Sz aS a s o 238 AND Compare gt a 155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read 239 Lo a 1 7 156 ZRN Zero Return 240 foR OR Compare 7 n 157 PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output g n 158 DRVI Drive to Increment a A 7 2S 1
175. g Connection cabling for extension device Erao FXss 0M gt x lt f 02020 07 Hooo I 00 k JI ook f e j 6 FX3s CNV ADP No Shape of connector or combination with cable FX3G 232 BD D SUB 9 Pin RS 232C FX3U 232ADP MB D SUB 9 Pin RS 232C FX3G 422 BD MINI DIN 8 Pin RS 422 FX3S CNV ADP Expansion board connector Peripheral device connector RS 422 MINI DIN 8 Pin Peripheral device connector USB Mini B connector USB 2 0 co N le fen e 3 USB A connector 4 USB cable Refer to Subsection 3 2 2 27 UOIONPO U N U TI a D a Z oO oO 30 D v nD 2 ONpold uononpou suonesyoods Aa Qi s3919 jesayd d pue uolsSJ3A wasis uoneinByuoy uoneleysu I Bui A ddns Jamod Bum ndu O pue uonevedaiy CO h SJ9 UN0D peeds ubIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication 3 2 1 Programming tool The following programming tools support FX3s Series PLCs For more information refer to 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability Model name Description GX Works2 Version 1 492N or later of SWLIDNC GXW2 E supports the FX3S FX 30P Version 1 50 or later of FX 30P supp
176. g settings RUN terminal settings RS RS2 instructions computer link inverter communication function communication settings Special parameters User created sequence programs Max 4 000 steps Comments and file registers can be created in the Comments MaX 11209 polls memory by setting them in the parameter memor 0 to 24 blocks 1 block 50 points 500 steps ry y g p y capacity Pie paniciers Max 2 000 points g 0 to 4 blocks 1 block 500 points 500 steps 183 W gt o O Q O O Q ss os F Q cE op op wh Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig 0008d 0008W d2 O 49 O Ss iq lt O iq op n r 5 S O gt E n sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 6 PROTECT Switch 17 6 PROTECT Switch 17 6 1 PROTECT switch setting Reading from and writing to memory cassette operations can be performed by using the programming tool Because sequence programs are written by an electronic format a special D O ROM writer and ultraviolet eraser are not required 0 The PROTECT switch must be turned OFF to enable writing or low O gl PROTECT q switch 17 6 2 PROTECT switch operation 1 Prepa
177. gh speed counters can be used as general input terminals 10 4 1 Allocation table U Up count input D Down count input A A phase input B B phase input R External reset input S External start input Input allocation a i High speed counter type High speed counter No C238 C239 O T B 1 phase 1 count input C240 a re a E ee co eae fo a io ee PS a SS E a a a a a ss EDP mee O R E OOOO O A EEE O O O Gd ee _ 7 haem O O l f E O Dna ea O pt O ON E OOO O OO E O ae O S S S iE 2 phase 2 count input ee Slr tec kel E a lll 1 When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program the input terminals and their associated functions are switched For the function switching method refer to Subsection 10 9 2 10 4 2 Restriction of redundant use of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interruption pulse catch SPD instruction ZRN instruction and DSZR instruction and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters UOI ONPO U 10 5 1 1 phase 1 count input NO These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters a Examples of program 22 1 For C235 ah x010 m e C235 counts the
178. ginpoy Aejds q owog I ayjessey eins oo S S all gJ oo S D op O g9 Q D g O iq n gt n ss S O ie n e sj powu penuljucosiq 205 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix C Discontinued models User s Manual Hardware Edition MEMO 206 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Warranty Warranty 1 Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall
179. he right figure to the main unit This work is not required when fixation is not necessary e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3x8 shorter screws Do not use M316 longer screws because they may damage the main unit 178 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 3 Installation 17 3 2 Installation D when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together z gt 8 Installation procedure Attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter to the main unit For the attachment method refer to Chapter 7 z Caution Make sure to attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter before the memory cassette Tightening with tapping screws M3x8 is not necessary 1 3 ss Remove the upper connector cover A in the 33 right figure e Ten 252 FE Remove the part B shown in the right figure i 1 using a nipper etc BO 15 RD 32L PLC OS Q po Sa Caution O p asm Removal of the part B is not necessary when the connector P conversion adapter is used together Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Re PD C in the right figure oS Z8 Attach the memory cassette to the option connector D in the right figure of the expansion board or connector conversion adapter
180. iary relays just before the counters UOI ONPO U NO High speed counter type Function switching method Details of change M8388 SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 C248 OP Reset input is not given M8388 yNpold C253 OP Reset input is not given uononpou 6 Oe 10 10 Cautions on Use For programming details refer to the Programming Manual suoneoyioeds f e Ifthe operation of a high speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch the counter may malfunction due to extra noise from switch chattering or contact bounce Qi e The input filter of an input terminal for a high speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 10 us UUs X000 X001 or 50 us X002 to X007 T g Accordingly it is not necessary to use special data register D8020 input filter adjustment amp oa The input filter for input relays not being used for high speed counters remains at 10 ms initial value a e The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interruption pulse catch SPD instruction ZRN instruction and DSZR instruction and general purpose inputs 6 Take care not to overlap the input numbers e e Make sure that the signal speed for high speed counters does not exceed the response frequency 2 described above If an input signal exceeds the response frequency a WDT error may occur or the ai communication functions such as a parallel link may malfunction S e The response frequenc
181. ies Manual supplied with product e Connector RS 232C D SUB 25 pin power female l EA RS 422 D SUB 25 pin s z3 female Screw for securing connector M2 6 screw FX 232AWC H 25 0 99 151 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja sgueu zuleN uny SOL O E e 4 nN O r Q 1x3 1940 a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig a s owog N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS Sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 1 Specifications 16 Display Module FX3s 5DM STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE C A UTI O N PRECAUTIONS Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards and special adapters Battery and me
182. ing upgrade Version Manufacturer s serial number Contents of version upgrade Ver 1 00 133 First product March 2013 eee FX3S 30ML1 ELJ 2AD First product 13X Ver 1 10 October 2013 e Supports connection of following expansion boards FX3G 4EX BD FX3G 2EYT BD 14Xx Ver 1 20 October 2014 Supports connection of display module FX3S 5DM 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tool 1 GX Works2 GX Works2 is applicable to FX3s PLCs from the following versions FX3S PLC version Applicable GX Works2 version Ver 1 00 Ver 1 492N or later 2 FX 30P FX 30P is applicable to FX3s PLCs from the following version FX3S PLC version Applicable FX 30P version Ver 1 00 Ver 1 50 or later 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable inapplicable programming tools can be used by selecting an alternative PLC model 1 Alternative model setting Model to be programmed Model to be set Priority High gt Low FX3S PLC FX3S gt FX3G gt FX1N gt FX2N 1 FX2N is selected when the FX 10P E is used 2 Contents of restrictions e Programming is enabled only in the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in both the FX3s PLC and the PLC selected as the alternative model e When the FX 10P E is used the function range such as instructions device ranges and program sizes is limited to that available in both
183. ink wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES Transistor output sink j ja ji J ja Je Internal circu 2 In the case of source wiring 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ESS Transistor output Source j J ji Je ja je 124 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS WARN N G e Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions e Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock e Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents e Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or de
184. input interruption pulse catch SPD instruction ZRN instruction DSZR instruction and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers 2 Cautions in wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Input Interruption lI0OLJ to 1500 9 3 3 Examples of external wiring It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 Examples of input interruption 1000 or 1001 wiring using X000 When another input terminal is used wire it according to the following diagrams 1 When 24 V DC service power supply is used 1 Class D grounding 1 1 Class D grounding 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 83 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou yONpold suoneoyioeds Aa Qi s39149q jesouduad pue UOISJ3 wasis uoneinByuo4y uoneleysu A Q PUS o oes oe O O Ge eet lt ox Bui induy SJ9 UNOD peeds ubIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 9 4 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 The main unit is provided with a pulse catch function and has 6 pulse catch input points
185. ions when setting and USING the SWItCN ccceecccseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeesaanees 184 17 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 005 185 17 7 1 Writing WR FX3G EEPROM 32L gt PLC cccccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseeesssaaeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeees 185 177 2 Reading RD EX3G EEPROM 32L lt PEG csaciet ett omer a Se ee 186 17 8 Memory cassette precautions fOr USC cccccccseececceeseeeceeneeccaeeeeeceeseeecsaueeessaseeessgeeessageessaas 186 Appendix A Special Device List 187 Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 ee eecec sees eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaees 187 Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 cece cece eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaees 193 Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8269 and D8260 to D8269 198 Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas 198 Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8269 i cceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeeeseeeeeeenaas 198 Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8289 and D8280 to D8289 199 Appendix A 4 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeeeeaas 199 Appendix A 4 2 Special data registers D8280 to D8289 i eccccccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeseeeeee
186. ip among the target value output value for auto tuning and the measured value and then execute auto tuning again lt Auto tuning is finished PID operation is not started gt Because the set value was fluctuated during auto tuning auto 6752 lt Step response method gt tuning was not executed correctly Improper auto tuning result Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change cycle or set a larger value for the input filter constant After changing the setting execute auto tuning again lt Limit cycle method gt 6753 rene are o ar Auto tuning operation direction mismatch lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not lt Limit cycle method gt started gt 6754 Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto tuning Check whether the target setting contents are correct SHPV lt 0 lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not 6755 Abnormal auto tuning transfer status started gt Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Ensure that devices occupied by PID instruction are not overwritten overwritten in the program lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not started gt lt Limit cyole method incase the circrence ULV EL belween eluent 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning measurement PP and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a o
187. iption D8278 Error status Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors For a detailed description of the error status refer to Subsection 11 3 10 Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b2 Unused b3 Unused b4 EEPROM error b5 Averaging time setting error common ch1 and ch2 b6 to b15 Unused Model code When the analog built in main unit is connected model code 5 is stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code Special data register Description D8279 Model code 104 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 11 3 8 Program example Create the following program to read out analog conversion A D conversion data The following program will store the converted A D value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 data into D101 Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8270 or D8271 can be directly used 1 as timer counter setting value or in a PID instruction FNC 12 pie S aoe l FNC 12 i Bojeuy ur ying Sets the averaging time for channel 1 Buum ndno N Sets the averaging tim
188. is ON Target instructions for rising edge pulse LDP ANDP ORP and pulse operation type applied instructions such as MOVP Contact ON OFF status Instruction for Instruction for while write during RUN is executed rising edge pulse falling edge pulse OFF Not executed Not executed ON Executed Not executed 1 The PLS instruction is not executed Writing in RUN mode to circuit blocks including the following instructions results in the following operation e MEP instruction Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEP instruction the execution result of the MEP instruction turns ON conducting state if the operation result up to the MEP instruction is ON MEF instruction Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEF instruction the execution result of the MEF instruction turns OFF nonconducting state regardless of the operation result ON or OFF up to the MEF instruction When the operation result up to the MEF instruction is set to ON once and then set to OFF the execution result of the MEF instruction turns ON conducting state Operation result up to MEP MEF instruction MEP instruction MEF instruction OFF OFF nonconducting OFF nonconducting ON ON conducting OFF nonconducting e When writing during RUN with GX Works2 the program is as follows
189. ist of Device Numbers and Functions 10 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions uononpou For details on the high speed counter number OP refer to Subsection 10 2 2 i Response Device No External reset External start a Frequency input terminal input terminal a C235 Nene None C236 C237 C238 None None C239 32 bit 1 phase 1 count input C240 bi directional High speed counter type Data length counter NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO Q CA2 e Provided None za a O lt a Provided Provided se 4 7 C248 OP C247 seit 1 phase 2 count input Provided None bi directional C248 counter 2 n Qi C249 Provided Provided C250 Sas 0253 0P 243 C257 32 bit 83S 2 phase 2 count input Provided None bi directional oS C253 counter a C2540 Provided Provided 6 1 When using multiple high speed counters make sure that the sum of used frequency does not exceed QY wn the overall frequency ae For details on the overall frequency refer to Section 10 7 ai S zA v D S 5 S97 EEE og 3s z a 87 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers 10 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers The high speed counter numbers are allocated to the input terminals X000 to X007 as shown in the following table The input terminals not allocated for hi
190. it mm inches 2 5 0 1 W Mounting hole pitch W FX3U 4AD ADP i FX3U 4DA ADP 9 FX3U 3A ADP EER FX3U 4AD PT ADP S72 1 10 FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 15 1 0 6 228 a B FX3U 4AD PNK ADP eae i 1S FX3U 4AD TC ADP t FX3U 232ADP MB lt 3 1 oir FX3U 485ADP MB 205 aT 9 2 Z amp i uH s13 UN09 peeds 57 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 7 4 2 Example of mounting hole pitches 7 4 3 The figure below shows an example when the FX3S 30MT ES FX3S CNV ADP and FX3U 232ADP MB are used 151 18 6 0 6 0 74 92 3 637 Unit mm inches poccc Installation of main unit 7 9 Mount the special adapters and connector conversion adapter FX3S CNV ADP on the main unit before installing the unit in the enclosure For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 7 5 3 and Subsection 7 5 4 Installation procedure Make mounting holes in the mounting surface according to the external dimensions diagram Fit the main unit A in the right figure based on the holes and secure it with M4 screws B in the right figure The positions of screws refer to Subsection 7 4 1 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 7 5 1 This section explains the connecting methods for extension devices Connection of ex
191. ited circuits mage Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits e Instruction to output high speed counters C235 to C255 OUT instruction 4 1 Circuit blocks cannot be edited to insert a label as shown below when written during RUN 3 3 Step 0 2 Pointer for interrupt 1001 6 Z 3 uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H 43 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability Item Circuit blocks which require attention on operation after write during RUN Others Caution Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output e DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 instructions with acceleration deceleration operation DRVI FNC158 and or DRVA FNC159 instructions Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instruction during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC immediately stops pulse output e PLSV FNC157 instruction without acceleration deceleration operation Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution e
192. l time clock D 8016 1 to 31 days i Day data for real time clock D 8017 1 to 12 months Month data for real time clock D 8018 2 digits of year data 0 to 99 i Year data for real time clock D 8019 O Sunday to 6 Saturday Day of the week dala for real time clock 1 4 is displayed even when the memory capacity is set to 16 K steps in the parameter setting 2 D8003 becomes the undermentioned content Present Dane Type of memory Protect switch 02H EEPROM memory cassette OFF OAH EEPROM memory cassette ON 10H Built in memory in PLC 3 Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan operation when M8039 is activated Number and name Input filter D 8020 Input filter adjustment D 8021 to D 8027 Index register Z0 and VO D 8028 D 8029 Analog volume and constant scan D 8030 D 8031 D 8032 to D 8038 D 8039 Constant scan duration Stepladder D 8040 6 ON state number 1 D 8041 8 ON state number 2 D 8042 8 ON state number 3 D 8043 6 ON state number 4 D 8044 8 ON state number 5 D 8045 6 ON state number 6 D 8046 6 ON state number 7 D 8047 8 ON state number 8 D 8048 to D 8059 4 Correspond ing special device Content of register Input filter value of X000 to X017 Default 10 ms 7 Value of ZO Z register 4 Value of VO V register 4 Value of analog volume VR1 Integer fro
193. lanations of the specifications for the memory cassette and Memory cassette i Chapter 17 2 the installation procedures E 4 Others Appendix A to Appendix C Division Reference 2 This chapter contains an explanation list of the special auxiliary relays M8000 to List of special devices M8511 and special data registers D8000 to D8511 Appendix A For details refer to the programming manual This chapter contains an explanation list of the basic instructions and applied O List of instructions instructions For details refer to the programming manual APPEN E A J eee Uster dieconiinued modele i aie MELSEC F Series PLC models and programming tools described in Appendix C S 8 i Q i uH 13 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual This manual describes detail on the hardware including the system configuration installation and wiring The instructions Communication control analog control and positioning control are explained in separate manuals Refer to the manuals as needed Fase STS Manual for each use Separate volume Refer to the manual for each purpose of use Main unit Built in functions e Sequence instructions User s Manual Hardware Edition e High speed counter JY997D48601 Model FX3S HW E PID instruction Details of hardware inc
194. larger The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 20 VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Load capacity Contact life 0 2 A 100 V AC 20 VA 3 000 000 times 0 1 A 200 V AC 0 35 A 100 V AC l 35 VA 1 000 000 times 0 17 A 200 V AC 0 8 A 100 V AC 80 VA 200 000 times 0 4 A 200 V AC The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush overcurrent is shut down Please refer to the following measures regarding the inductive load Refer to Subsection 12 1 3 2 Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 2 Lamp load Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 3 Capacitive load Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters
195. lay screen protect function is set to level 2 FNC 12 The system information for the screen E MOV K130 D8158 f protect function is set to D133 E D133 The display is set to only device monitor 16 12 Error display enable disable It is selectable whether or not operation errors etc will be displayed Special data register System Information Description Enable Disable operation errors etc D8159 K A A MA A 3 ON Enables the display of operation errors and serial communication error 1 OFF Disables the display of operation errors and serial communication error 1 Caution e The following errors are unconditionally displayed when they occur PLC hardware error Parameter error Syntax error Circuit error e If two or more errors have occurred the priority is given to errors to be unconditionally displayed Additionally the error with the smallest error number has overall priority Refer to Section 16 7 for error display screen 175 Bojeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS 10 buum OO s sSN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi OOO on 5 a L m a D 5 n O 5 NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejdsig a s Howay Ni y sseN 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 13 Operation Button ON OFF Information
196. le of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring 0 1A50V Q diode is sx i necessary a X001VX002VX003VX004VX005VX006VX007 52 53 54 59 56 57 M M M M M M O ba N 99 wt LO O N lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ZN X001VX002VX003VX004VxX005VX006VX007 O N 99 wt LO O N m m 0p m m m m m s s s s s BS y S 5 Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ES zav coma vora vors yor4 Connect pull up resistors 33 kQ 0 5 W when using inputs X000 to X017 2 In the case of source wiring w N 99 tT LO N 0 1A50V LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO diode is s1 y y y y 3 y necessary X001 VX002 VX003 VX004 VX005 VX006 VX007 w N 90 lt T LO N lt T lt T lt T wt wt tr wt wt gt 3 y 3 3 y 3 y W X001 VX002 VX003 VX004 VX005 VX006 VX007 w N 99 t LO N oe oe oe oe 9P 9P e oe s 12 o 2 Main unit Example FX3S 30MT ESS Connect pull down resistors 3 3 kQ 0 5 W when using inputs X000 to X017 122 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instruction FNC 74 BCD Instruction FNC 18 11 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instruction FNC 74 z BCD Instruction FNC 18 13 4 1 When SEGL instruction FNC 74 is used 12 This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 4
197. log special adapters Manuals supplied with product FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC separate manual The manuals for FX3S Series will be available in or after May 2013 Each product comes with the installation manual or the User s Manual Installation manual The part names installation procedures and specifications are shown As for the functions and program examples refer to the separate User s Manual OOO Edition User s Manual Positioning Control Edition JY997D16801 Model FX3U U POS E Details of wiring instructions and FX3S FX3G FX3GC operations of positioning functions in FX3U FX3UC PLC main unit separate manual User s manual The procedures for wiring and installing specifications and functions are explained The manuals for FX3S Series will be available in or after May 2013 To use some products separate manuals may be necessary 14 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 3 List of manuals FX3S Series PLC main units supplied only with the hardware manual For the details of the hardware of FX3s Series refer to this manual For instructions for programming and hardware information on special function devices refer to the relevant manuals uononpou N Indispensable manuals v Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Manual Manual Name
198. ls or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all
199. ltage Insulation resistance 500 V DC 5 MQ or more 14 1 2 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector RS 422 1 When connecting a peripheral device Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device Programming connector RS 422 MR ES LOT 134 Communication N cable Positioning mark 2 For continuous use of a peripheral device such as GOT Cut off the area shown in the left figure below of the peripheral device connector cover main unit using a nipper etc and connect the peripheral device as shown in the right figure below Peripheral device connecting connector cover Connection example Communication cable Cut off the dotted line area 126 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 3 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector USB D Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device personal computer At connection confirm the cable and connector shape 2 Programming connector aT 12 6 VR2 2 s 30M 3 Ta NY E USB Mini B connector SS aire F j USB Mini B plug O E e 4
200. luding Positioning instructions FX3S input output specifications wiring Built in analog separate installation and maintenance of PLC manual main unit Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction JY997D16601 Model FX P3 E Details of sequence program including basic and applied instructions and various devices The manuals for FX3S Series will be available in or after May 2013 e Display module e Memory cassette FX3S FX3G FX3GC i FXSUIFX3UC separate manual Structured Programming Manual For details on structured programming FX refer to the following manual separate MELSEC QIL F Structured manual Programming Manual Fundamentals SH 080782 Model Q FX KP KI E FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Device amp Common JY997D26001 Model FX KP DK E FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Basic amp Applied instruction JY997D34701 Model FX KP SM E FXCPU Structured Programming Manual Application Functions JY997D34801 Model FX KP OK E e Analog e Communication User s Manual Data Communication Edition JY997D16901 Model FX U COMMU E Details of N N Network parallel link computer link non protocol separate communication and programming manual communication The manuals for FX3S Series will be available in or after May 2013 FX User s Manual Analog Control Edition JY997D16701 Model FX3U U ANALOG E Details of analog expansion boards and ana
201. m 0 to 255 Value of analog volume VR2 Integer from 0 to 255 Not used Bunoousejqno Default 0 ms in 1 ms steps Writes from system ROM at power ON Can be overwritten by program M8039 The smallest number out of active state ranging from SO to S255 is stored in D8040 and the second smallest state number is stored in D8041 Active state numbers are then sequentially stored in registers up to D8047 Max 8 points M8047 l The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to D8195 5 6 FX3s 30MU EL 2AD is not supported Executed at END instruction 193 h s sSN SNOEN Buum Indno N Sopuy umng 10 buum OO wh Ja sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue shun x3 JOUIO a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q Howay N Q las N ep D D 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d jeloeds sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device Error detection Refer to Subsection 14 6 3 for details P8060 3 1606 B06 P1804 e064 P1808 e088 18068 E 9 Error step number of M8065 to M8065 to Parallel link i rror time out check D18071 10 1018073 i Memory information 0a D 8101 2 o 1 0 0 PLC
202. m the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions e Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 74 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition uononpou WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO Doing so may cause damage to the product a3 Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or Se thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 5 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC pow
203. mat cccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 176 17 Memory Cassette 177 EON bas ote ntcnate bac gai se econ scat ac saesh E ncn eeaa tne acca a a eaeiaunt sean eaceetecmancadass 177 TZ SSS CIN AMOMS mses ra R 177 17 2 1 Electrical specifications 0 0 0 cccccccecceeceeceeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeseeceeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeessaeeesseaeeeseaeseeessaeesaaes 177 17 2 2 Part names and external dimensions cccccccssceccseecceeeccuceccuecceucecausescueesceessueessueessueesaaeenes 177 AT co SIS Tell AMO ll orsa ia yacuazsacaantce ness eacuemeatancabascaanteraaaanamac samo acen ait a5 waa seaaneaesahahansaeachandeasens 178 17 3 1 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together 178 17 3 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 179 Ac REMOVA sacaarssnasariasadeeceasaraneasuatotanseaanianicen saiadiaanaconaaaeanuniadae RA 181 17 4 1 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are not used together 181 17 4 2 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are used together 182 Io SAVES Aka COMIC IN oe ae scle ch sate thet e dtc cette dante nce Sa an el delete eisai oa hers Bene bole 183 ITO PROTECT S Wile scx rcice eed aa a Rede tetisdadanad sewn 184 TEOGA PROTECT SWIN SetiD wisest aco eee ee ae ne dl eat eos 184 1726 2 PROTECT SWiItGhOPeCratlO nn ernpreresr rna austen teehee a tees ones seats 184 17 6 3 Precaut
204. may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 14 7 2 24V DC input does not operate 1 Input does not turn on Disconnect the external wiring and connect the S S terminal and the OV terminal or the 24V terminal Short circuit the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S terminal and the input terminal then check the input display LED or a peripheral device to confirm that the input turns on Action Check that the input device does not have a built in diode or parallel resistance When input turns on If so refer to Subsection 9 2 2 Measure the voltage between the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S terminal and When input does not turn on the input terminal with a tester to confirm that the voltage is 24 V DC Check the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices Input does not turn off Check for leakage current from input devices If the leakage current is larger than 1 5 mA it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance For details on the measures refer to Subsection 9 2 2 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword 1 Cautions in registering keyword The keyword limits access to the program prepared by the user from peripheral devices Keep the keyword carefully If
205. me of 1 ns and period of 30 to 100 Hz Dielectric withstand 1 5 kV AC for 1 min voltage 500 V AC for 1 min Between each terminals and ground terminal Insulation resistance 5 MQ or more by 500 V DC megger Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Groundin lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt a Working atmosphere Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dust Working altitude lt 2000 m4 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resistance test of the terminals of each product refer to the following Refer to Subsection 4 1 1 3 Ground the PLC independently or jointly Refer to Section 8 3 PLC Other Other Other equipment equipment equipment Q Q O o Q Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed 4 The PLC cannot be used at a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure to avoid damage 29 uononpou N S WEN Hed pue sounjee4 OO ONpod 5 Q Q Q O SUOI EOIJIO8dS Qi s 9149q jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu I O0 Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p i uH s13 UN09 peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units Us
206. memory Provided Program can be modified while the PLC is running inoun eo maurin gunning For the writing function during running refer to Subsection 5 2 5 Keyword function With keyword Customer keyword function Built in Real time clock Clock function 1980 to 2079 with correction for leap year 2 or 4 digit year accuracy within 45 seconds month at 25 C Sequence instructions 29 Step ladder instructions 2 Basic instructions Kinds of instructions Applied instructions 116 kinds Basic instructions 0 21 us instruction Processing speed Applied instructions 0 5 us to several hundred us instruction Number of input lnput points 16 points or less Extension is impossible output points Output points 14 points or less Extension is impossible X000 to X017 Y000 to Y015 MO to M383 384 points M384 to M511 128 points M512 to M1535 1024 points M8000 to M8511 512 points Input relay Input output relay The device numbers are octal Output relay For general p EEPROM keep Auxiliary relay For general For special For initial state EEPROM keep SO to S9 10 points Sale EEPROM keep S10 to 127 118 points For general 128 to S255 128 points 100 ms TO to T31 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec 0 01 to 327 67 sec 400 ms 10 ms T32 to T62 31 points When M8028 is driven ON timers T32 to aaa T62 31 points are changed to 10 ms resolution T63 to T127 65 points 0 001 to 32 767 sec T128 to T131 0 001 t
207. meters are built in Upper side VR1 Lower side VR2 Two analog inputs are built in These terminals are for wiring the analog inputs Connect a programming tool PC to program a sequence For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 Connect a programming tool to program a sequence For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with screws When the terminal block covers are open 1 Power supply terminals 2 Input X terminals 3 Output Y terminals 4 Terminal cover 5 Service power supply terminals only AC power type 1 2 GS JOG Ni ssi x j z MELEG FXas vV 5 4 3 Connect the power supply to the main unit Wire switches and sensors to the terminals Wire loads contactors solenoid valves etc to be driven to the terminals A protective terminal cover refer to the following drawing is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block The cover prevents fingers from touching terminals thereby improving safety JOQOOOOOOO0O0OD Wire sensors or other external equipment to these terminals when the service power supply 24 V DC is used for such equipment 22 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 2
208. mory cassette 16 1 Specifications 16 1 1 Applicable PLC Model name Applicability FX3S Series Ver 1 20 or later 16 1 2 Display Specifications Item Specifications Display device TN monochrome liquid crystal display Display character Seven segment display icon display Backlight Green LED backlight Button 4 operation buttons ESC and OK 152 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 Installation and Removal 16 1 3 External Dimensions and Part Names D 5 Unit mm inches J amp Z 3 Cut off this part when using an expansion board 1 3 at the same time S 39 1 30 9 6 0 38 ce e2 12 0 48 D Ja 1 OK button 5 Display 2 button 6 Connector for PLC dz SDP 3 button 7 Display module fixing hook S D 4 4 ESC button When used together with an expansion board 8 gt O Q EJ 16 2 Installation and Removal _ Qi Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the display module OOO S25 ouv a L m on D 5 Q 16 2 1 Installation and Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together The FX3S 30MT ES is used as the main unit in this example JA a Remove the top cover ae Ss Remove the top cover A in the figure on the right as _ shown in the right figure 17 C aoe Install remove the displa
209. n d jeloeds sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Number and name Operation and function Counter up down counter counting direction M 8200 M 8201 M 8202 M 8203 M 8204 M 8205 M 8206 M 8207 M 8208 M 8209 M 8210 M 8211 M 8212 M 8213 M 8214 M 8215 M 8216 M 8217 M 8218 M 8219 M 8220 M 8221 M 8222 M 8223 M 8224 M 8225 M 8226 M 8227 M 8228 M 8229 M 8230 M 8231 M 8232 M 8233 M 8234 High speed counter up down counter counting direction M 8235 M 8236 M 8237 M 8238 M 8239 M 8240 M 8241 M 8242 M 8243 M 8244 M 8245 X O C211 ezn O N o C231 O When M8LILILI is ON the corresponding CLILIL is changed to down mode ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation When M8LILILI is ON the corresponding CLILIL is changed to down mode ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation Correspond ing special device on Number and name Operation and function Correspond ing special device High speed counter up down counter monitoring M 8246 M 8247 M 8248 M 8249 M 8250 M 8251 M 8252 M 8253 M 8254 M 8255 M 8256 to M 8259 Not used C246 C250 When COOLI of 1 phase 2 input counter or 2 phase 2 C249 input counter is in down mode the corresponding
210. n very heavy industrial areas However Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed for the users complete control system Sensitive analog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling Where possible users should run analog cables separately Good cable shielding should be used When terminating the shield at Earth ensure that no earth loops are accidentally created When reading analog values EMC accuracy can be improved by averaging the readings This can be achieved either through functions on the analog product or through a user s program in the FX3s Series PLC main unit 12 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals uononpou 1 introduction This manual explains the procedures for selecting the system components main unit specifications and procedures for installing the main unit and procedures for operating the display module etc FX3s PLCs can make various kinds of control in combination with the main unit functions and many extension devices expansion board and special adapters The detailed explanation of the sequence instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are given in separate manuals For information on manual organization refer to Subsection 1 1 2 N SOWeN Hed pue soinjeo4 Oo 1 1 Introduction of Manuals
211. nN SE Oo O Q 14 1 4 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO Turn on the PLC power Make sure that the RUN STOP switch of the PLC is set to STOP and turn the power on a s uoisue Check the program Jg Check for circuit errors and grammatical errors with the program check function of the on programming tool SE Transfer the sequence program Write the program to the PLC with the programming tool PROTECT switch owog N When the memory cassette is used i I Make sure to set the PROTECT switch of the memory cassette to OFF Tera 0O e shown right sb amg eed For details on the memory cassette refer to Chapter 17 ut O a i ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS Verify the sequence program Verify that the program has been correctly written to the PLC Execute PLC diagnosis Check for errors in the PLC main body with the PLC diagnostic function of the programming tool For details on the PLC diagnosis with GX Works2 refer to Section 14 6 For details on the PLC diagnosis with FX 30P refer to FX 30P operation Manual sj pow penuljuoosiq 127 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Ru
212. nalog potentiometer function cccecccccseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeseueessaeeesenseesaeeeenes 99 2 OUTING OF MUIMGUONS se xinsesoecsese ceases onartecncietincde selate a eae teeientnataeets 99 E2 Z AN 6 0 Te 8 9 PL anemia rumen tee toon N a ee ec ie een ee 99 VI12 3 SPC Clal Catal TegiS te sen cs25 see crde nes aaesccaeiey A sete deenta sedachecer AE A 99 11 2 4 Use example of variable analog potentiometer cccccceccccceeceeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeesseeeessaeeessaes 100 11 3 BuUiltai analog Input UMC HON sasra inne cet i sete E A R EREE E ER 101 TES OUlNne of HUM NUON aa EN 101 W322 PAD IICAD Sa Gs pnia E E A OE E E dozeteueesecentcantes 101 11 3 3 Analog input performance SPeECIFICATIONS cccceccccseeceeeeeceeaeeceeseeceeaeeceeseecesseeceeseeceeseeeeeseesses 101 11 3 4 Analog input terminal blocK wes actees tonciaue deltaic deevard aninddovnicssnirobe dc uidaendlissestetainreunietlatheauigunde vateets 102 TAS OAM AN NAY OU kii Ara baaites scnaban vib wge cnn aut age a ew geeeeinasdenieareensetemue ys 103 oOo MAIO IOUT INO co a E a eae mathe a EA 103 tior Specialdata TEQISUC wie cence aa aaan aE het E E RA obsess sell Ea a a R 103 11 3 8 Program CXAIN DIG s5sictaraienavencatatrttuantetatotucenettsedncuwenledmeaensteunoxecn el dateeiduadiavaceasemundencdnansdentedeecands 105 11 3 9 Changing of input CharacteristiCs narisane a aa 105 11 3 10 Troubleshooting when using built in analog input eee ce ec e
213. ncompatible proportional gain KP KP lt 0 This error occurs in the parameter setting value or operation 6734 Incompatible integral time TI TI lt 0 data executing PID instruction Tas incompatible derivative gain KD Check the contents of the parameters KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD 6736 Incompatible derivative time TD TD lt 0 137 JJ c gt v O Q O O Q Ss 5 F Q cS op op uny SOL Bunoousejqnou QOUBUSIUIE Ln Qi suodo pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q Howay N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 Contents of error Action lt Auto tuning is continued gt 6740 Sampling time TS lt Scan time The operation is continued in the condition sampling time TS cyclic time scan time 6742 Variation of measured value exceeds limit APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV 6743 Deviation exceeds limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV 6744 Integral result exceeds limit lt PID operation is continued gt Outside range from 32768 to 32767 The operation is con
214. nd explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation safe use and operation of the FX3S Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit And store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Outline Precautions This manual provides information for the use of the FX3s Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows a Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment b Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature
215. nfirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Registration Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Phillips is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company The company name and the pro
216. ng trailing edge pulse MC MCR Master Control Instruction Denotes the start of a master control block Denotes the end of a master control block Other Instruction NOP No operation or null step End Instruction END Program END I O refresh and Return to Step 0 Mnemonic STL RET Function Starts step ladder Completes step ladder 201 JJ c gt o O Q O O Q ss o gt F Q cE op op wh Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q s Kioweyy N sseN gt e oo S S D gJ o S D s n d jeloeds S17 UORONJSU sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Mnemonic Function FNC No Mnemonic Function Program Flow Data Operation 00 Conditional Jump 40 Zone Reset 01 Call Subroutine 41 Decode 02 Subroutine Return 42 Encode 03 Interrupt Return 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits 04 Enable Interrupt 44 Check Specified Bit Status 05 DE Disable Interrupt 45 Mean 06 Main Routine Program End 46 Los 07 WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh 47 Lf 08 FOR Start a FOR NEXT Loop 48 he oe 09 End a FOR NEXT Loop 49
217. nnecting method C connection of Special Adapter ccc ceccceceececeeseceseeceeseeeceseeeeesaeeeeseaes 61 TO FRO CAMONN ON il AOS Secale eee tee T re ca lee tc te ste Sbload cc tad nbc geben 62 7 6 1 Application of Station No label FX3G 485 BD cccceccceesseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeessaeeeeeeeas 62 7 6 2 Application of Station No label FX3G 485 BD RUJ cccccceeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeesseaeeeeseaees 62 7 6 3 Application of trimmer layout Label FX3G 8AV BD ccccccecceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 63 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 64 6 1 Preparation Tor VVINING asise a hina danich i ecae hanes dane 66 1 Ms WiN Procedures ssaa RE e NE E N a a AN 66 8 2 Cable Connecting Proced reS arrore o a E T EA 67 8 21 Terminal DIOGK Mal Unit rerni E EE eee sie 67 8 2 2 Terminal block for European expansion board and special adapters ccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeees 68 8 2 3 Grounding terminal of the FX3G 485 BD RJ cc cecccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeesaaeeeeseseeeenesaeges 69 8 2 4 Grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaeeeeeesaeeeeesaanes 70 D0 Ground Gerines O A 71 8 4 Examples of External Wiring AC power type cccccseccccseececee
218. nning and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 1 Methods of running and stopping Operation with built in RUN STOP switch FX3S PLCs can be started or stopped by any of the following three methods Two of the methods can be combined The RUN STOP switch is located under the peripheral device connector cover RUN STOP switch Operate the RUN STOP switch on the front panel of the main unit to start and stop the nih PLC refer to the right figure Turn the switch to RUN and the PLC will start Turn it to STOP and the PLC will stop O20n0 O OeO DON a05 Z ro O UNO RRO Running and stopping with general purpose input RUN terminal Operation with one switch RUN One of the input terminals X000 to X017 of the main unit can be used as a RUN input terminal by a parameter setting refer to the figure below When the specified input terminal is turned on the PLC starts When it is turned off the PLC is started or stopped depending on the state of the built in RUN STOP switch 1 X000 to X005 in FX3s 10ML X000 to X007 in FX3s 14ML and X000 to X013 in FX3s 20ML For details refer to Kinds of Parameters and Settings in Programming Manual General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter S S X000 X007 xoo2 Main unit Source input Operation with two switches RUN and STOP The PLC can be starte
219. ns and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 Terminal Layout UOI ONPO U The terminal layout of the main unit are explained 4 7 1 Interpretation of terminal block layout NO Power supply terminals Input terminals SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO Output terminals Vacant terminal FX3S 30MR ES FX3S 30MT ES Pn SRSA yy Dohotuse 2S com3 Y7 Y11 Y12 Y14 3 24V COMO COM1 COM2 COM4 _ Partition 24 V DC service Common terminal Output terminals power supply 4 points common terminal e Indication of power supply terminals The AC power supply type has L and N terminals The DC power supply type has and terminals For external wiring make sure to read the power supply wiring described later SUOI EOIJIO8dS Qi Refer to Chapter 8 oJ U lt e Indication of 24 V DC service power supply ss z The AC power supply type has OV and 24V terminals whereas the DC power supply type shows ARa since the DC power supply type does not have the service power supply a represents vacant terminals Do not connect with vacant terminals 6 For external wiring make sure to read the power supply wiring described later Refer to Chapter 8 9 e Indication of input terminal 3 Both AC and DC power supply type have the same input terminals however the external input wiring 5 differs from each other For external wiring
220. nteatebenMenbdasnantonsisoudwanorussbinaauad nak hauaa Rota stecaaeind nue amteandeneenals 169 16 9 3 Program example2 when monitoring consecutive timers using operation button 170 16 9 4 Program example3 when monitoring non consecutive timers using operation buttons 171 16 9 5 Specified device Editing FUNCTION russere a EE 172 16 10 BACK NIG IAL ORT TTA CU IN eas etter ects ern Mac Da etre eld elas E A tate R 174 16 10 1 System Information Back light Off FUNCTION ee ceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeas 174 16 11 Display Screen Protect FUNCTION ccccccceececeeeeeseeeeceeseeceuseceeeesegeesseeeeseueesseseeseaeesseeeeess 175 16 11 1 System information display screen protect FUNCTION cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeenes 175 16 11 2 Program example screen protect function SEttING cccceeeccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaaaes 175 16 12 Error display enable disable ccccccccccsssceccseseeccaeeeecceaeeeeeceueeecsugeeesseeeessneeessgeeessaneeeeees 175 16 13 Operation Button ON OFF Information cccccccccccseccceeececeeeeceesesaeeeeseaeessaeeeseaeesseeeessneeees 176 TON WARIOUS AD PIC AUOINS i sedis os canst a a a a a sarees a adie 176 16 13 2 System information operation button ON OFF information cccccceecccceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeanes 176 16 14 Specifying a Decimal Hexadecimal Current Value Display For
221. ntil the output contact is turned on and from when the coil is shut off until the output contact is turned off is approx 10 ms 6 Output current At a circuit voltage of 240 V AC or less a resistance load of 2 A per point or an inductive load of 80 VA or less 100 V AC or 200 V AC can be driven For the life of the contact for switching an inductive load refer to Subsection 14 4 2 When an inductive load is switched connect a diode for commutation or a surge absorber in parallel with this load DC circuit Diode for commutation AC circuit Surge absorber 7 Open circuit leakage current When the output contact is turned off no current leaks 1 250 V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards 2 UL and cUL standards approved at 120 and 240 V AC 110 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 Output Wiring Procedures 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 3 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuiting A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in this product It is recommended to use inductive loads with built in protection circui
222. nting direction can be checked with M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 1 phase 2 count input A Automatic up count or down count according to change in spas i input status of phase A B 2 phase 2 count tf i 1 1 p p mot OMN The counting direction can be checked with M8251 to M8255 P B phase LP Ly ON Down counting Up counting Down counting OFF Up counting 10 2 2 High speed counter device notations The input terminal assignments for FX3s PLC high speed counters can be switched when used in combination with a special auxiliary relay This section classifies these high speed counter devices under the following notations Note that an OP input cannot be programmed Switched device numbers C248 OP C253 OP Standard device numbers C248 C253 10 2 3 Cautions in connecting mating device Encoders with the output forms in the following table can be connected to the input terminals The encoders may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility Check the specifications in advance Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high speed counter input terminals Terminals for connecting Output form that can be directly connected Input terminals of main unit Open collector transistor output form applicable to 24 V DC 86 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 L
223. nual on e Additional RAUEN TANP JY997D45801 Describes FX3U ENET ADP Ethernet communication 09R725 Manual User s Manual special adapter details gt i uH s13 UN09 peeds 15 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Manual Bortente Model Number Code E RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition For the MODBUS communication refer to the FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition SUPR Ia FX3G 232 BD Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D32001 Installation Manual special adapter product Supplied seis FX3U 232ADP MB Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D26401 Installation Manual special adapter product Supplied PA i FX3U 232ADP Procedures for handling the RS 232C communication with JY997D13701 Installation Manual special adapter product SupPiee FX3G 422 BD Procedures for handling the communication with JY997D32101 Installation Manual expansion board product Supplied pes FX3G 485 BD Pr r for handlin mmunication with F jyaa7p32201 hana Aa Installation Manual expansion board product Supplied iar RF FX3G 485 BD RJ Procedures for handling communication with JY99
224. number of times the input terminal X000 own coun M8236 ecu switches from OFF to ON while X012 is on OO While X011 is on the counter resets when RST instruction X011 RST Reset is executed e The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or up 5a 235 K 5 count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 S g 3 2 g x010 e C244 starts counting immediately when the input terminal 5 M8244 TAAN X006 turns on while X012 is on The count input terminal is X000 The setting for this example is the data of the TA X011 ree 2 indirectly designated data register D1 DO B39 eS es RST C244 Reset es oid EE ee e C244 can be reset by X011 on the sequence For C244 Ta X012 X001 is allocated as the external reset input The counter mae resets immediately when X001 turns on oo e The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or up Pie Sonne tse count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 wasis CD Count input External reset External start input input uoneinByuoy Main unit Example of operation The above counter C235 operates as shown below uoneleysu I X010 Up count Down count Up count X011 Reset input f O0 o 3 z 2 aT X012 Start input T ge X000 Q Count input 4 Current 4 l value 0 0 R 1 When output has 4 A operated T r Er 5 af 3 7 C235 output contact 89 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Co
225. number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Qi s3919 jesayd d pue uolIsSJ3A wasis uoneinByuoy gt n gmr 2 D O Bum nduy QO pue uonevedaig i uH s13 UN09 peeds 65 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 1 Preparation for Wiring 8 1 Preparation for Wiring 8 1 1 Wiring procedures Before starting wiring work make sure that the main power is off Prepare the parts for wiring Prepare the solderless terminals and cables necessary for wiring For details refer to Section 8 2 Wire the power supply terminals In the case of AC power type e Connect the power supply to the terminals L and N In the case of DC power type e Connect the power supply to the terminals and O Provide the power supply circuit with the protection circuit shown in this subsection For details refer to Section 8 4 Wire the ground terminal at a grounding resistance of 100 or less Class D Connect a class D ground wire to the terminal For details refer to Section 8 3 and Section 8 4 Wire the input X terminals For input select sink or source input by the following connection In the case of AC power type e For sink input connect the 24V
226. o 32 767 sec T132 to T137 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec Available as analog timers Variable analog potentiometers VR1 D8030 VR2 D8031 For compatible PLCs refer to Chapter 11 on delay timer 1 ms 1 ms accumulating type 100 ms accumulating type Available as voltage inputs Analog inputs ch1 D8270 ch2 D8271 For compatible PLCs refer to Chapter 11 16 bits up For general CO to C15 Counting from 0 to 32 767 16 bits up EEPROM keep C16 to C31 Counting from 0 to 32 767 Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 32 bits up down For general C200 to C234 35 points 2 147 483 647 Counter 34 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications Item Performance 1 phase 1 count input in both directions 32 bits up down C235 to C245 EEPROM keep uononpou N 1 phase 2 count input in both High speed counter directions 32 bits up down C246 to C250 Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 EEPROM keep 2 phase 2 count input in both directions 32 bits up down C251 to C255 EEPROM keep For general 16 bits DO to D127 128 points For EEPROM keep 16 bits D128 to D255 128 points For general 16 bits D256 to D2999 2744 points Data register File register 32 bits when D1000 to D2999 paired EEPROM keep For special 16 bits D8000 to D8511 512 points VO to V7 For index 16
227. o YO15 0 2 ms or less 200 mA or more at 24 V DC Output circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation 5 Output operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven Sig Sink output wiring Source output wiring eas 2 So n DI s S Q Output circuit configuration os eo c3 3i A common number applies to the LU of A common number applies to the U of 7 COMO VO i D v q syy 288 oo 3s 2 5 z a i uH s13 UN09 peeds 33 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications 4 5 Performance Specifications The performance specifications for the main unit are explained below Item Performance Operation control system Stored program repetitive operation system with interruption function Batch processing system when END instruction is executed Saeco me Sy sieln Input output refresh instruction and pulse catch function are provided Programming language Relay symbol system step ladder system SFC notation possible 16 000 steps EEPROM memory Program capacity is 4000 steps Max allowable write 20 000 times 32 000 steps EEPROM memory with loader function The FX3S Series PLC is available only to 16 000 steps Program capacity is 4000 steps Max allowable write 10 000 times Built in memory capacity type Memory cassette Option Program
228. ollow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 52 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 1 Installation location 7 1 Installation location Use the PLC under the environmental conditions complying with the generic specifications Section 4 1 e Keep a space of 50 mm 1 97 or more between the unit main body and another device or structure Install the unit as far away as possible from high voltage lines high voltage
229. on EE AC power supply H COM A common number applies to the U of COMU 32 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 2 Transistor output specifications Transistor output specification Item FX3S 10MTO FX3S 14MTL FX3S 20MTLI FX3S 30MTLU uononpou N Output connecting type Fixed terminal block M3 screw a Transistor sink output FX3S OMT OS FX3S 30MT ES 2AD as a p Transistor source output FX3S LIMT LISS FX3S 30MT ESS 2AD Se o External power supply 5 to 30 V DC 3 i N 5 Q 0 5 A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value For details on the common terminal for each model refer to the Section 4 7 3 Resistance load e 1 output point common terminal 0 5 A or less 5 e 4 output points common terminal 0 8 A or less S 2 Max load cS 12 W 24 V DC 5 The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value E ee For details on the common terminal for each model refer to the Section 4 7 e 1 output point common terminal 12 W or less 24 V DC e 4 output points common terminal 19 2 W or less 24 V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA or less 30 V DC 3 ON voltage 1 5 V or less 3 OFF ON Y000 Y001 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24 V DC s Response time K ON OFF Y002 t
230. onitor i Snu Teques ON BUSY OFF READY MM 8403 3 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 D8403 a asda Y000 Clear signal output function Receive complete flag enable M 8404 RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 1 3 M8342 1 YOOO Zero return direction i Carrier detection flag 2 specification RS2 instruction FNC 87 ch1 SS M 8405 7 JE M 8343 Y000 Forward limit Data set ready DSR flag oS O M 8344 Y000 Reverse limit TGE g A wn M 8345 Y000 DOG signal logic reverse M 8409 seer tea ne 87 ch1 z a z M 8346 A MeD e420 14 g 0 Y000 Positioning instruction M 8401 MODBUS request in process S D 4 MaaR M 8402 MODBUS communication error D8402 Ta a eo M 8349 1 Y000 Pulse output stop command M 8403 ee communication error D8403 Y001 Pulse output monitor Me339 ON BUSY OFF READY pelea 10 MISO i 1 5 4 Y001 Clear signal output function M 8408 OSs z m pe Y001 Zero return direction M 8410 e specification M 8411 MODBUS configuration request flag D M 8353 Y001 Forward limit 7 FX3U ENET ADP ch1 M 8354 Y001 Reverse limit i M 8404 FX3U ENET ADP unit ready 16 i z lt 8 M 8356 7 Y001 Zero point signal logic i M 8406 4 Time setting execution OB reverse on _ sa M18407 t0 MISAO 3 ot use E IM 8358 Y001 Positioning instruction i activation Positioning 4 7 M 8359 Y001 Pulse output stop command aAa a i a M18380 to e369 7 ZRN instruction FNC186 l l M 8464 Z
231. ons of C246 to C250 can a be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to The setting is D3 D2 M8250 Up counting Down counting input input ON Down counting OFF Up counting For C249 x011 a eens e While X012 is on C249 starts counting immediately when A SOE RST C249 the input terminal X006 turns on The up counting input eee eee aes terminal is X000 and the down counting input terminal is X012 X001 C249 K1234 29 e C249 can be reset on the sequence by X011 For C249 X002 is allocated as reset input When X002 turns on C249 Down counting External start is immediately reset l input input Up counting H External reset 4 e The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 Main unit ON Down counting OFF Up counting 90 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters 10 5 3 2 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters UOI ONPO U NO Examples of program 1 For C251 While X012 is on C251 counts the operation of the input X011 c RST terminals X000 A phase and X001 B phase through interruption SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 X012
232. or Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Examples of External Wiring DC power type 8 5 Examples of External Wiring DC power type z 24 V DC S Circuit protector 2 Power ON oo 5 ao E PL Mc 3 S QS gt ye 7 j In the case of sink input wiring k mergency OO NO c m m m m Ml Ml i l stop Main cp eaaa ae g HeT Class D oS 5 grounding g gt l S ig l i a i cs a i oa K Power supply for load 4 zs connected to PLC output g 2 W h gt AY x0 For details on emergency stop 9 operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field In the case of source input wiring Sa _ Qi e USS E oS a Input 8 3 2 impedance I o Mo o i e Peg Ss 6 OW oe ee 5 ane Load wn v D r O 1 Connect DC power to and terminals As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 Do not connect with vacant terminal Bui Aj ddns Jamod Bum nduy QO pue uonevedaig h SJ9 UNOD peeds ubi1H 73 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Input Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure
233. ort built in main unit GT1020LBL 5 V DC type FX3G 422 BD GT1020LBL 5 V DC type Avoid continuous use of two GT1020LBL 5 V DC type units Special adapter system configuration One special communication adapter and one special analog adapter can be connected A connector conversion adapter is required to use special adapters Communication Analog Connect a connector special adapter special adapter conversion adapter FX3U 4AD ADP e FX3U 4DA ADP e FX3U 3A ADP Max 1 unit FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP e FX3U 4AD TC ADP 1 When using the FX3U ENET ADP connect it to the last adapter position leftmost position e FX3U 232ADP MB e FX3U ENET ADP 1 e FX3U 485ADP MB 50 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition l Installation In Enclosure DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 2 3 4 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit
234. orts the FX3S 3 2 2 Communication cables Model name Description USB cable bj 3m USB A plug lt gt USB Mini B plug USB cable 4 9 10 For connection between personal computer and FX3S programming port USB RS 232C cable 3m_ D SUB 9 Pin lt gt D SUB 25 Pin F2 232CAB 1 Ki 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m_ D SUB 25 Pin lt gt D SUB 25 Pin F2 232CAB 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m_ Half pitch 14 Pin lt gt D SUB 25 Pin F2 232CAB 2 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m D SUB 9 Pin lt gt D SUB 9 Pin FX 232CAB 1 5 anm For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter FX3G 232 BD ew FX3U 232ADP MB 3m Half pitch 14 Pin lt gt D SUB 9 Pin FX 232CAB 2 5 sanm FOr connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter FX3G 232 BD ew FX3U 232ADP MB RS 422 cable 15m D SUB 25 Pin lt gt MINI DIN 8 Pin FX 422CAB0 PA zaam For connection between RS 232C RS 422 converter and FX3S programming port RS 422 a FX3G 422 BD 1 5m MINI DIN 8 Pin lt gt MINI DIN 8 Pin FX 20P CABO 3 411 For connection between FX 30P and FX3S programming port RS 422 FX3G 422 BD 1 The following USB cables are applicable Model name Description MR J3USBCBL3M USB cable 3 m 9 10 GT09 C30USB 5P USB cable to transfer personal com
235. pecial adapter uononpou suonesyioods Aa Independent grounding Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Qi 2 Sas e Use ground wires thicker than AWG14 2 mm earl 2S e Position the grounding point as close to the PLC as possible to decrease the length of the ground wire a S as S uo ejesu i 1 T a a WM se D D O s13 UN0N 71 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Examples of External Wiring AC power type 8 4 Examples of External Wiring AC power type 24 V DC service power supply of the main unit can be used as a power supply for loads 100 to 240 V AC Breaker Power ON rT Mc TY Op In the case of sink input wiring z mergency i stop Mainunit SoSo 74 2 0 50 0 f Power supply for load connected to PLC output Po For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field In the case of source input wiring 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100 V AC system and 200 V AC system As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 The OV and 24V terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 72 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 8 Preparation f
236. poy Aejds q Howay N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7 Troubleshooting For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 14 2 For the procedures on operating peripheral devices refer to the manuals for the peripheral devices 14 7 1 Output does not operate 1 Output does not turn on Stop the PLC and forcibly turn the inoperable output on then off with a peripheral device to check its operation Check for troubles with external wiring e When the output operates The output may be turned off unintentionally in the program Reexamine the program Duplicate coil or RST instructions e When the output does not operate Check the configuration of the connected devices If the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices are acceptable the output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Output does not turn off Stop the PLC and check that the output turns off Check for trouble with external wiring e When the output turns off The output may be turned on unintentionally in the program Check that there are no duplicate coils in the program e When the output does not turn off The output circuit
237. pplied with product e Terminal block European type 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 15 1 2 FX3U 4DA ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Accessories Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 142 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Special Adapters 15 1 3 FX3uU 3A ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 15 1 4 FX3u 4AD PT W ADP MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs Installation Accessories DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches co v mounting hole pitch 15 1 5 FX3u 4AD PNK ADP MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs Installation Accessories DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch
238. puter data USB A plug 3 m 9 10 3 2 3 Converters and interface Model name Description RS 232C RS 422 converters RS 232C RS 422 converter Communication speed Applicable to 9 600 to 115 200 bps FX 232AWC H 2 2 When the programming software is not applicable to FX3s or FX3G the converter is applicable only to 9 600 or 19 200 bps 28 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Generic Specifications 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units This chapter explains the specifications external dimensions and terminal layout of the main units 4 1 Generic Specifications The generic specifications for the main unit are explained below Item Specification Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Hz Acceleration m s Half amplitude mm iaar a i sii Sweep Count for srtotso a XY 2 10 times When installed on Vibration resistance DIN rail When installed directly 10 to 57 0 075 80 min in each Shock resistance 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11 ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise resistance By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1 000 Vp p noise width of 1 us rise ti
239. r at slave station No 7 D16219 1o D18250 3 Analog expansion board Refer to Appendix A 3 for details D8260 to D8269 Expansion board Built in analog input Refer to Chapter 11 for details D18270 eer D272 DBRT DB276 DBRT D278 Dizo Analog special adapter Refer to Appendix A 4 for details D8280 to D8289 D 8290 to D 8299 1 Available only for FX3s 30MU EL 2AD Special adapter Not used 195 W gt o O Q O O Q ss os F Q cE op op wh Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q Kiowsyy I Q las N ep D D 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d jeiveds sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device Positioning D 8340 Lower Y000 Current value register D 8341 Default 0 Y000 Bias speed ais Default 0 D 8343 Y000 Maximum speed i D 8344 Default 100000 Y000 Creep speed oasis Default 1000 j D 8346 Y000 Zero return speed i D 8347 Default 50000 Y000 Acceleration time aes Default 100 j Y000 Deceleration time eo Default 100 D 8350 Y001 Current value register D 835
240. r code Keyword error display When the keyword is registered in the PLC only Time display and setting and Error display valid invalid are displayed and other items cannot be displayed eld LUTT EIA If the OK button is pressed when the keyword is registered the error r display blinks for 5 seconds CCEA Release the keyword by using a peripheral unit AEETI 166 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 5DM Control Functions Restrictions From PLC 16 8 5DM Control Functions Restrictions From PLC Some of the display module functions require system information settings in order to enable program control of these functions Functions which require the use of system information are listed below e Specified device monitor function e Error display valid invalid Refer to Section 16 9 details Refer to Section 16 12 details e Back light off function e Operation button ON OFF information Refer to Section 16 10 details Refer to Section 16 13 details e Display screen protect function e Decimal hexadecimal current value display Refer to Section 16 11 details setting For hexadecimal display of value Refer to Section 16 14 for the setting procedure 16 8 1 System information list Devices with head number specified in special data register D8158 and D8159 are assigned as system information devices data register auxilia
241. r fixing the memory cassette Two types of longer and shorter M3 tapping screws are packed together with the memory cassette Read carefully the installation method described in Section 17 3 and use the proper type Number of available units Only one memory cassette may be connected to a FX3s main units EEPROM memory writing count 10 000 writing operations are permitted at the EEPROM memory Precaution for file register D usage Writing to the flash memory occurs at each PLC operation cycle if BMOV instructions are used in a continuous execution format with regard to a file register To prevent this be sure to use pulse execution format BMOVP instructions 186 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 re a gt Appendix A Special Device List 5 The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays indicated as special M in tables and 12 special data registers indicated as special D in tables are shown below Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the series of the PLC z Do not use the undefined blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in the sequence program since they are occupied by the CPU a In addition do not activate or write to the devices with brackets on the first letter such as M 8000 or D 8001 in the program 1
242. r power lines or inductive lines r Ova 2 Make sure to short circuit the VLJ and V terminals when ch is not used SF 7 aa 11 3 7 Special data register ea _ Qi The following is a list of associated special devices Special data register Description Attribute D8270 Channel 1 input data R suo do pue sun XZ 194 O D8271 Channel 2 input data R z D8272 S E Unused Do not use i 1 6 D8274 Averaging time for channel 1 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W ZO D8276 os IAT Unused Do not use 3 D8270 R 17 SS 1 Input data T The data converted by the PLC will be stored in special data registers c The converted A D immediate data or averaged data data average conforming to the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the input data The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table Special data register Description E D8270 Channel 1 input data S D8271 Channel 2 input data z S Caution regarding input data Input data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the input data using sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq 103 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 Built in analog input function 2 Averaging time If the averaging time is set in the PLC the averaged data will be stor
243. r set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement time ton gt q ton lt 0 t lt 0 138 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation Contents of error code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 lt Limit cycle method gt 6757 Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP outside range from 0 to 32767 lt Limit cycle method gt 6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time TI outside range from 0 to 32767 lt Limit cycle method gt 6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time TD outside range from 0 to 32767 6760 ABS data read from servo sum check error 6762 Continues Port specified by inverter communication instruction is already operation Used in another communication Input X specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is already 6763 used in another instruction 6764 Pulse output number is already used in a positioning instruction or pulse output instruction PLSY PWM etc 6770 Memory access error 6772 EEPROM memory cassette is protected against writing USB communication error M8487 D8487 Communication character error 8703 Communication data sum check error 8704 Data format error operation 8730 Memory access error Special p
244. refer to Section 4 7 2EY usiH sJ9 uno9 peeds 31 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 1 The output specifications for the main unit are explained below Relay output specifications Relay output specification Item FX3S 10MRLU FX3S 14MRLU FX3S 20MRL FX3S 30MRL Output connecting type Fixed terminal block M3 screw Output form Relay 30 V DC or less External power supply 240 V AC or less 250 V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards 2 A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value Resistance load For details on the common terminal for each model refer to the Section 4 7 e 1 output point common terminal 2 A or less Max load e 4 output points common terminal 8 A or less 80 VA UL and cUL standards approved at 120 and 240 V AC Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 2 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 Min load 5 V DC 2 mA reference value Open circuit leakage current OFF ON Response time ONOFF Approx 10 ms Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Output operation display LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil Output circuit configurati
245. refer to Section 7 3 2 Direct installing with screws e The PLC can be installed directly in the enclosure with M4 screws For the mounting hole pitch refer to Section 7 4 7 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail The main unit can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide 7 3 1 Preparation for installation 1 Connecting extension devices Some extension devices must be mounted on the main unit before the unit is installed in the enclosure e Mount the special adapter or connector conversion adapter FX3S CNV ADP on the main unit before installing the main unit to the enclosure e The expansion boards display module and memory cassette can be fitted to the main unit after it is installed 2 Affixing the dust proof sheet The dust proof sheet should be affixed to the ventilation port before beginning the installation and wiring work Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet when the installation and wiring work is completed For the affixing procedure refer to the instructions on the dust proof sheet FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 7 3 2 Installation of main unit The main unit must be installed before installing a special adapter or connector conversion adapter FX3S CNV ADP on the enclosure For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 7
246. ring the operation tools Set the PROTECT switch knob by using the tip of a pair of tweezers a Shape of tool tip precision screwdriver or a tool with a tip width of approx 0 8 mm 0 04 Good Do not use objects with round tips as the round tip can easily slip off the switch knob possibly resulting in an incorrect setting Tool tip Bad Switch operation procedure As shown in the figure below the switch knob can be pushed or pulled When setting the switch do not set it in an intermediate position Push direction Switch setting tool gt Switch case i Pull direction a S Switch knob gt OFF ON OFF ON 17 6 3 Precautions when setting and using the switch Leaving the switch knob at an intermediate position for an extended period can cause an equipment failure FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 17 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function The FX3G EEPROM 32L loader function WR and RD key operation is explained in this section e Program transfers reading writing are possible between the memory cassette and the PLC s internal EEPROM memory e The loader function is enabled while the PLC is stopped 17 7 1 Writing WR FX3G EEPROM 32L gt PLC A memory cassette program is written to the PLC s internal EEPROM memory
247. rminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed a s Howay N ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloeds gt sj pow penuljucosiq 109 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type This section explains handling of relay output external wiring precautions and example of external wiring For the relay output specifications refer to Subsection 4 4 1 12 1 1 Product life of relay contacts For product life of relay contacts refer to Subsection 14 4 2 12 1 2 Handling of relay output 1 Output terminal One common terminal is used for 1 or 4 relay output points The common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems for example 100 V AC and 24 V DC Main unit 2 External power supply Use an external power supply of 30 V DC or less or 240 V AC or less for loads 3 Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and external load circuits are electrically insulated between the output relay coil and contact The common terminal blocks are separated from one another 4 Display of operation When power is applied to the output relay coil the LED is lit and the output contact is turned on 5 Response time The response time of the output relay from when the power is applied to the coil u
248. rminals externally Doing so may damage the product a When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified
249. rogrammed in invalid location 6632 FEND programmed in invalid location Operation error M8067 D8067 0000 Lo No error e No jump destination pointer for CJ or CALL instruction e Label is undefined or out of PO to P255 due to indexing 6701 e Label P63 is executed in CALL instruction cannot be used This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the in CALL instruction as P63 is for jumping to END program and check the contents of the operands used in instruction applied instructions 6702 CALL instruction nesting level is 6 or more Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation error may still occur 6704 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level is 6 or more For example 6705 Operand of applied instruction is inapplicable device T1002 itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the r timer T200 would attempt to be accessed This would cause Device number range or data value for operand of applied i 6706 La an operation error since there is no T200 device available instruction exceeds limit 6709 Continues Other e g improper branching operauon This error occurs when the same device is used within the 6710 Mismatch among parameters ae a source and destination in a shift instruction etc 6730 Incorrect sampling time TS TS lt 0 Incompatible input filter constant a eis a lt 0 or 100 lt a 2 lt PID instruction is stopped gt 6733 I
250. rol E Common FX3S FX3G F X3GC FX3U FX3UC ae Additional Series User s Manual JY997D16801 Details of positioning functions of FX3S FX3G FX3GC 09R620 mente Positioning Control Edition PRUE ROO SENES Manuals for FX 30P Supplied FX 30P Describes FX 30P specification extracted from the FX with JY997D34201 30P Operation manual Installation Manual product For details refer to FX 30P Operation manual neaitona ANT JY997D34401 Describes Handy Programming Panel FX 30P details Manual Operation Manual Other manuals 09R924 When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed E input extension Supplied with PAGEA BD JY997D51301 Procedures for handling the 4 points input expansion i User s Manual board product E Output extension Supplied FX3G 2EYT BD Procedures for handling the 2 points transistor output with JY997D51401 p product User s Manual expansion board E Variable analog potentiometers Procedures for handling the 8 ch variable analog Supplied FX3G 8AV BD potentiometers expansion board with JY997D33701 When using refer to FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Installation Manual product Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition E Connector conversion Supplied FX3S CNV ADP Procedures for handling the conversion function with JY997D48801 expansion adapter for connectors for connecting
251. rs User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device 5 FX3U ENET ADP ch1 amp D 8400 IP Address Low order D 8401 IP Address High order 1 2 D 8402 Subnet mask Low order 2 D 8403 Subnet mask High order 3 5 Default router IP address z eee Low order j amp Default router IP address Pea High order i 1 3 D 8406 Status information ss D 8407 Connection condition of the i T Ethernet port o D 8408 FX3U ENET ADP version D D 8409 Communication timeout time D 8410 Connection forcible nullification 1 4 D 8411 Time setting functional operation Se result GLa Oo a D 8412 to D 8414 Host MAC address gS D D E pears D 8416 Model code a D 8417 Error code of the Ethernet adapter 1 5 peara 9S9 D 8419 Operation mode F D Positioning o aR D18460 10 D18463 d O DSZR instruction FNC150 and ZRN instruction FNC156 aii Y000 Clear signal device Meee 1 6 specification 2 o wn DSZR_ instruction FNC150 and OB ZRN instruction FNC156 oz pee Y001 Clear signal device meee Ss 3 specification a 58466 1o D18467 17 Error detection D BA68 to E486 T n D 8487 USB communication error M8487 DoE 7 D 8489 eal code for special parameter M8489 FX3U ENET ADP ch1 D 8492 IP address setting Low order i ea D 8493 IP address setting High order S 5 D 8494 Subnet mask setting Low order 38 D 8495 Subne
252. ry before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock CAUTION won Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly Please wire using the correct polarity Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of
253. ry relay Data register excluding special data register should be specified for the system information s system signal 1 and auxiliary relay excluding special auxiliary relay should be specified for the system information s system signal 2 Both D8158 and D8159 have default settings of 1 Disables 5DM control functions Refer to Section 16 9 to Section 16 14 for explanations of each system signal 1 System signal 1 pedis Cate system Description Reference register Information poo Device type to be displayed era aa For specified device monitor function Section 16 9 08158 KOO DOO 1 evice No to be displayed Occupies DOO 2 Back light off time minutes Section 16 10 5 points poo 3 Device for display screen protect function Section 16 11 boo 2 System signal 2 Specla date System Description Reference register Information Request Edit of displayed device data Section 16 9 Edit completion response sea off ee Turns on backlight forcedly Section 16 10 Operation button ON OFF information Section 16 13 ee MA A 6 button status 15 points MA A 7 OK button status Decimal nexadecimal value display setting ON Hexadecimal OFF Decimal PEOHOM IGA Specified device monitor screen display status MA A 9 ON The specified device monitor screen is displayed Section 16 9 OFF Any screen other than the specified device monitor screen is displayed a 167 Bojeuy ul jing Buum nding N 10
254. s described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual If the screws are tightened outside of the specified torque range poor connections may cause malfunctions When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the peripheral device cables securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Connect the display module memory cas
255. s with higher priority using external signals whose minimum ON duration or OFF duration is 10 us X000 X001 or 50 us X002 to X005 The timer interruption function is also provided Refer to Chapter 9 and Programming Manual Pulse output function When output terminals in the transistor output type main unit are used pulses of up to 100 kHz can be output simultaneously to 2 axes Y000 and Y001 Using a number of instructions programming is simplified Refer to Positioning Control Edition Various positioning instructions Instruction Description DSZR Mechanical zero return instruction with DOG search function Instruction to read the current value from ABS our servo amplifier with absolute position ABS detecting function DRVI Positioning relative positioning to specify the movement from the current position Positioning absolute positioning to DRVA specify the target position based on the current value 0 Instruction to change the pulse train output PLSV frequency Refer to Positioning Control Edition 19 5 mr Ss Q Q Q z O SOWeN Hed pue soinjeo4 OO uononpou Npald suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h s19 UN0J peeds ubiIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Features and Part Names
256. sette and expansion board securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards special adapters and memory cassette Connect the memory cassette securely to the appropriate connector Loose connections may cause malfunctions Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions 51 uononpou N S WEN Hed pue sounjeo4 OO uononpou Npold suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesOydued pue UOISJS wasis CD O O zh Q jad O UONe e SUI oo Bui A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p uH s13 UN0N peeds FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on th
257. so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Bunny yndino Do not supply power to the 24V terminal 24 V DC service power supply on the main unit Doing so may cause damage to the product a Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit with a wire 2 mm or ce thicker Q P Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 8 3 Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Noise resistance may be lower when the L and N wires of an AC power supply are not wired correctly Ja Please wire using the correct polarity SEF Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual oZy If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out P T Do not wire vacant terminals externally ae Doing so may damage the product au Q When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause
258. specifications Model Name Max Memory Capacity Memory Type A jar l a 32 000 steps FX3G EEPROM 32L Ne FX3S Series PLC can hold 16 000 steps of EEPROM 10 000 times Provided Provided memory but user program capacity is limited to memory 4 000 steps 17 2 2 Part names and external dimensions suodo pue Sun XZ 1940 a s uoisue oe ss PD on Us o iq Unit mm inches 4 3 2 1 Asowey ayjessey m PROTECT SW Ui a 35 1 387 9 6 0 38 z T 1 RD key 5 Memory cassette fixing holes 2 93 2 Mounting holes z Reading PLC gt memory cassette 6 PROTECT switch T 2 RD LED 7 Detachment lever 3 WR key 8 Main unit connector writing memory cassette PLC 4 WR LED S17 UORONJSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt Sj pow penuljucosiq 177 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 17 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 3 Installation 17 3 Installation 17 3 1 Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the memory cassette Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together Installation procedure Remove the top cover A in the right figure Raise the memory cassette detachment lever B in the right figure Install the memory cassette to the main unit The memory cassette D in the right figure can be fixed with provided M3 tapping screws C in t
259. sposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 3 GHEE S2fety Precautions ED Read these precautions before use 4 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS WARNING 7 Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and 125 the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation 152 An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program CAUTION m Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC
260. status of the PLC is determined by the conditions shown in the following table 4 2 Condition of built in RUN STOP switch Status of PLC o specified as RUN terminal by parameter S OFF RUN RUN OFF STOP A RUN 13 Use either built in RUN STOP switch or the general input specified as RUN terminal SS When specifying the general purpose terminal as the RUN terminal always set the built in RUN STOP co switch to STOP gs 2 When the remote running stopping operation from the programming software is performed For this operation keep both the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose input RUN terminal in the STOP position If the stop command is given from the programming tool after the PLC is started by either the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal the PLC will be restored to the running status by giving the RUN command from the programming tool This can also be accomplished by setting the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal to STOP and then to RUN O E e 4 nN D O O Q _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q owog I ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljucosiq 129 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and
261. struction List Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions Mnemonic Function Contact Instruction LD Initial logical operation contact type NO normally open LDI Initial logical operation contact type NC normally closed LDP Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse LDF Initial logical operation of Falling trailing edge pulse AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts ANI Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts ANDP Serial connection of Rising edge pulse ANDF Serial connection of Falling trailing edge pulse OR Parallel connection of NO normally open contacts ORI Parallel connection of NC normally closed contacts ORP Parallel connection of Rising edge pulse ORF Parallel connection of Falling trailing edge pulse Connection Instruction ANB Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits ORB Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits MPS Stores the current result of the internal PLC operations MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations MPP Pops recalls and removes the currently stored result INV Invert the current result of the internal PLC operations MEP Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse MEF Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions Mnemonic Function Out Instruction OUT Final logical operation type coil drive SET SET Bit device latch ON RST RESET Bit device OFF PLS Rising edge pulse PLF Falli
262. t Function of input circuit The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler and the second circuit is provided with a C R filter The C R filter is designed to prevent malfunctions caused by chattering of the input contact and noise from the input line There is a delay of approx 10 ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON Change of filter time X000 to X017 have digital filters and the filter time can be changed in increments of 1 ms in the range from 0 to 15 ms through special data register D8020 When 0 is specified for the time the input filter values are set as shown in the following table Input number Input filter value when 0 is specified X000 X001 10 us X002 to X007 50 us X010 to X017 200 us 77 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Npald suoneoyioeds Aa Qi s39149q jesouduad pue UOISJ3 wasis CD uoneinByuo4y uo ejesu i oo ae o 2 D oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox Bui induy SJ9 UNOD peeds ubIH 9 Input Wiring Procedures FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 Input sensitivity The PLC input current and input sensitivity are shown in the following table When there is a series diode or resistance at the input contact or there is a parallel resistance or leakage current at the inp
263. t mask setting High order S Default router IP address setting mois Low order i B D 8497 Default router IP address setting i A High order D 8498 Error code for IP address storage Q area write D 8499 Error code for IP address storage i area clear C 18500 1o OST 30 On Qao 0 O oO gt 5 a 197 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8269 and D8260 to D8269 Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8269 and D8260 to D8269 When analog expansion boards are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column For details refer to the Analog Control Edition Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 Operation and function Number M 8260 Output mode switching M 8261 Not used M 8262 Not used M 8263 Not used M 8264 Output hold mode M 8265 Not used M 8266 Not used M 8267 Not used M 8268 Not used M 8269 Not used Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8269 Operation and function Number D 8260 Output data D 8261 Not used D 8262 Not used D 8263 Not used D 8264 ee orem Not used D 8265 aa orena Not used D 8266 Not used D 8267 Not used D 8268 Error status D 8269 Model code K4 Appendix A Special Device List App
264. taching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged e Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative e Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any connection cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards special adapters and memory cassette h Jo buum OO S F O 77 S D a7 uny S L sgueu zuleN Bunooys jqnosj _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue TO DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION aye PE Ss e Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device E a D TRANSPORTATION AND 1 7 STORAGE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION oz D D 3 e The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifications D 4 Section 4 1 using dedicated packaging boxes and shock absorbing palettes Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation v
265. tching between sink source input To switch the input type to sink or source input wire the S S terminal to the OV or 24V or terminal e Inthe case of AC power type Sink input 24V terminal and S S terminal are connected Source input OV terminal and S S terminal are connected For wiring examples refer to Subsection 9 2 3 e Inthe case of DC power type Sink input terminal and S S terminal are connected Source input terminal and S S terminal are connected For wiring examples refer to Subsection 9 2 4 3 Cautions for using Mixed use of sink source inputs It is possible to set all input terminals X of the main unit to either sink input or source input mode However a mixture of sink and source input terminals cannot be set within a single unit Differences from FX1s PLCs in input specifications reference Sink input type only FX1S PLCs manuals in Japanese are supplied and sink source input type FX1S PLCs manuals in English are supplied have different model names e For sink input type only FX1S PLCs the S S terminal and the 24V terminal are connected internally unlike in FX3S PLCs When replacing a sink input type only FX1s PLC with a FX3s PLC short circuit the S S and 24V terminals and use the OV terminal of the FX3s as the COM terminal of the FX1s for wiring e Sink source input type FX1S PLCs are configured in sink or source input mode using external wiring
266. tee 91 10 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value cccccceeceeeeeeeeees 92 1 0 6 1 Timing of updating of current Value sera ee ed Re ene ed 92 10 6 2 Comparison of current value ccccceeccccccececeeeeecaeeeeeeae cesses eeeeaeeeesaeecesaeeeesaeeeeesueeeesaaeessageeesanees 92 10 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency cccccccccceccececeseeeeeceececseeeeseecesaueeeseeeesseeeeeees 93 10 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary EnCoder ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeecseeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeesaaeeeesaaeeeesaaes 94 10 8 1 phase input C239 t0 C245 x oa ce eee a es es ee ee eee 94 10 8 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 oo cccccceseeeceeececeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeesseeeesaeeeeeseesesseeeessaeeesseeeeesaneees 95 10 9 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures cccccccccseeeeseeeeeaeeeeceeeesaeeeseeeeeaeeeesees 96 NOLO Related COVICES fcaisaanetreces a uest iar eax a Ruwais tor want Aue eA 96 10 9 2 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals cceeeee 97 10 10 Cautions OM WSO xc5 c acces E ee ante de esduenlateoe a E eacees 97 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 11 Use of Built in Analog 98 USM At MOOI TN So ctis tohas ein cnceahtsaahes te caaaae E acces sie cuter a aice saaree tena cuen saree herent scaapameeteweancesacecae 99 11 2 Built in variable a
267. tension devices This subsection explains the method for connecting the main unit expansion board connector conversion adapter and special adapters using the connection configuration example shown below Example of configuration Connector Special conversion Expansion adapter adapter board FX3S Series main unit Connecting Connecting Connecting method C methodB method A For the connection method A refer to Subsection 7 5 2 For the connection method B refer to Subsection 7 5 3 For the connection method C refer to Subsection 7 5 4 58 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 7 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 7 5 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion board This subsection explains how to connect the expansion board to the main unit Connection procedure Remove the top cover A in the right figure from the front face of the main unit Connect the expansion board to the option connector B in the right figure Fix the expansion board D in the right figure to the main unit with M3 tapping screws C in the right figure supplied as accessories of the expansion board e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 59 UOIONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjeo4 Oo uononpou Npold suoneoyioeds f Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis uoneinByuo4y 8
268. ter referring to the following diagrams It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder Fuse 24 V DC Class D grounding i T Rotary encoder PLC 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder Fuse 24 V DC Class D grounding iL n Rotary encoder PLC 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 94 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 8 Examples of External Wiring Rotary Encoder 10 8 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 UOI ONPO U The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C251 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair cables for connection cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side NO 1 NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 Rotary encoder OO uononpou yOnpold suojeoyioeds Aa 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder i el Qi Rotary encoder s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu I 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less p o ao 0p Ke oa lt
269. terminal and the terminal of the main unit In the case of source input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the terminal of the main unit Do not connect with vacant terminal 81 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou Np suojeoyioeds Aa Qi s3919 jesoudued pue UOISJS wasis CD uoneinByuoy uoneleysu i oo Q Fp o 2 D oe O O Ge eet lt 8 ox Bui induy SJ9 UN0D peeds ubiIH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Input Interruption lI0OL to 1500 9 3 Input Interruption 100 to 1500 The main unit is provided with an input interruption function and has 6 interruption input points Make sure that the ON duration or OFF duration of interruption input signals is 10 us or more X000 X001 or 50 us or more X002 to X005 For details on programming refer to the programming manual 9 3 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration number Interrupt disable control ON or OFF duration of input signal leading edge trailing edge X000 1001 M8050 X001 1101 M8051 X002 1201 M8052 X003 1301 M8053 X004 1401 M8054 X005 1501 M8055 10 us or more 1100 1200 300 1400 1500 50 us or more 9 3 2 Cautions for input interruption 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter
270. ters available for adjusting the timer set time Up to 8 points can be added by using the optional analog potentiometer expansion board Built in analog inputs only FX3S 30MLI ELJ 2AD The PLC has two built in analog inputs available for voltage input Additional analog input points can be added by using an optional expansion board or special adapter Writing during RUN The programming software for personal computer enables you to modify the program while the PLC is running Built in clock function The PLC has a clock function to control the time Programming tool Use a version of a programming tool supporting the FX3s Refer to Chapter 5 Remote debugging of program Programming software enables you to remotely transfer programs and monitor PLC operation through a modem connected to the RS 232C expansion board or the RS 232C communication special adapter 2 Input output high speed processing functions of main unit High speed counter function 1 phase 60 kHz x 2 points 10 kHz x 4 points 2 phase 30 kHz x 1 points 5 kHz x 1 point Refer to Chapter 10 and Programming Manual Pulse catch function Signals with short ON width or OFF width can be captured without a complicated program Refer to Chapter 9 and Programming Manual Signal ON OFF width 10 us 50 us Input terminal X000 X001 X002 to X005 Input interruption function The PLC can process interruption routine
271. the FX3s PLC and the FX2N PLC e Use a programming tool that can select either FX3G to change parameters i e memory capacity file register capacity etc e Memory capacity must be set to 4000 steps or less e Use a programming tool that can select the FX3G model to program using the built in USB port 41 UOI ONPO U NO SOWeN Hed pue sounjee4 OO uononpou ONpoJd ep O D Q Q A O 7 S8DINOQ jesoudued pue UOISI3 wasis CD uoneinByuoy uo ejesu i O0 Buin A ddns samod ue uolesedaid Bun induy CO p h SJ9 UN0D peeds ubiH FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tools 1 Built in USB communication The FX3s PLC has a built in USB communication port and performs program writing program reading and monitoring at high speed 12 Mbps with a personal computer that supports USB 1 Supported programming tools GX Works2 GX Developer 2 In programming tools not supporting USB Communication is performed via RS 422 or RS 232C 2 RS 422 RS 232C communication The FX3s PLC can write and read programs and perform monitoring at 115 2 kbps through RS 422 RS 232C communication 1 115 2 kbps supported programming tools GX Works2 GX Developer FX 30P 2 115 2 kbps supported interfaces
272. the scan time D8012 2 Remove the PLC and supply power to it from another power supply on a desk If the ERR LED goes off noise may have affected the PLC Take the following measures Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring route and installation location Fit a noise filter onto the power supply line 3 Ifthe ERR LED does not go off even after the measures stated in 1 and 2 are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative One of the following errors has occurred in the PLC Flashing Parameter error e Syntax error e Ladder error Perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool For the remedies refer to Section 14 6 If the operations of the PLC are abnormal perform PLC diagnosis and Off No errors that stop the PLC have occurred program check with the programming tool A Serial communication error or Operation error may have occurred 132 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error codes can be checked with the programming tool Bojeuy ul jing 14 6 1 Operation and check by GX Works2 4 1 Connect the personal computer and the PLC Buum ndino NS 2 Execute the PLC diagnosis h Jo buum OO Click Diagnostics PLC Di
273. thernet C24 GOT CCIE Field Head Module Module Module Master Loca Module KDO 1 PLC Mode FXCPU 2 PC side I F Serial Setting D RS 232C O Other i 02 Connection Channel List PLC Direct Coupled Setting ek Connection Test Time Out Sec 5 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps Network PLC Type Communication lt CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link 7 i NET 10 H ystem Image x gt Bea TEL FXCPU Co existence OK Route CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link 24 NET 10 H Cancel sel Accessing Host Station Station E include FX USB AW 7 FX3U USB BD Cancel Setting al C USB No Specification Setup COM Port com 1 T jesaydu d pue uoISJ3A wasis uoneinByuoy a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode uoneleysu i PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT PLC Module CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter Setup O0 a Cancel C C 293 via GOT direct coupled transparent mode oe via AU emet transparent mode 3 5 Select FXCPU g M via GOT F900 transparent mode Select via GOT direct coupled transparent mode 9 C C24 z3 Put a check mark to the check box S via GOT F900 transparent mode 3 OL 53 o WM 6 Click the OK button to finish the setting a 47 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Appli
274. tically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 2 3 4 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions e Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 118 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring WO WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARNING amp Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product 1 2 Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work
275. tinued with each parameter set to the 6745 Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative gain KD maximum or minimum value 6746 Derivative result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 6747 PID operation result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 z E aa PID output upper limit set value lt PID output lower limit set Transposeo pu TPES Halt valle e wer mt 6748 ire value PID operation is continued gt Check whether the target setting contents are correct 6749 Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output lt Alarm output is not given gt PID operation is continued gt variation alarm set value Set value lt 0 Check whether the target setting contents are correct lt Auto tuning is finished PID operation is started gt e The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less lt Step response method gt e The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1 3 or more of the 6750 oor Improper auto tuning result deviation at start of auto tuning Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not Continues started gt operation The operation direction estimated from the measured value at lt Step response method gt the start of auto tuning was different from the actual operation 6751 lt a hae Auto tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto tuning Correct the relationsh
276. tor Staus Remote RUN A l Monitori of PLC is displayed DE ie Eia D E POWER PLC Information __Remote stor _ eA a RUN _ e Memory Type RAM Clear PLC Memory CPU Version 1 00 o Seck Stop Monitor Close 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt Sj pow penuljucosiq 133 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 2 Representation of errors Errors are represented in this manual and GX Works2 as shown in the following table This manual GX Works2 PLC hardware error PLC Hardware Error PLC PP communication error PLC PP Communication Error Serial communication error 1 ch1 Link Error Parameter error Parameter Error Syntax error Syntax Error Circuit error Ladder Error Operation error Operation Error USB communication error USB communication error Special parameter error Special Parameter Error 134 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 3 Error Code List and Action D When a program error occurs in the PLC the error code is stored in special data registers D8061 to D8067 D8487 and D8489 Take action based on the following information PLC
277. torque range poor connections may cause malfunctions When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the peripheral device cables securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Connect the display module memory cassette and expansion board securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices display module expansion boards special adapters and memory cassette Connect the memory cassette securely to the appropriate connector Loose connections may cause malfunctions Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions GHEE S2fety Precautions ED Read these precautions before use WIRING PRECAUTIONS WARNING 7 Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accesso
278. ts When using loads without built in protection circuits insert an external contact protection circuit etc to reduce noise and extend the product life 1 DC circuit Connect a diode in parallel with the load The diode for commutation must comply with the following specifications Guide 5 to 10 times the load voltage Item Reverse voltage Forward current Load current or more Main unit Inductive load PLC output contact Diode for commutation 2 AC circuit Connect the surge absorber combined CR components such as a surge killer and spark killer etc parallel to the load Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber Inductive load that is suitable for the load being used Refer to the PLC output table below for other specifications contact Surge Item Guide absorber Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1 uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 200 Q Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a oe hazardous condition could result if switched ON Sarl simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner Interlock rotation x P Normal PLC output N Limitof
279. type and system version eon 1 00 l F X3S Series 2 K steps 4K steps D18703 to OIBT09 D 8102 Memory capacity RS instruction FNC 80 and computer link ch1 RS instruction FNC 80 and D 81204 computer link ch1 Communication format setting 4 Computer link ch1 f DGLA Station number setting RS instruction FNC 80 2 De tee Remaining points of transmit data mee RS instruction FNC 80 2 D 8123 Monitoring receive data points mE RS instruction FNC 80 oe Header lt Default STX gt l RS instruction FNC 80 eines Terminator lt Default ETX gt i pisas Computer link ch1 D 8127 Specification of on demand head device register Computer link ch1 D 8128 Specification of on demand data MeN length register RS instruction FNC 80 computer D 81294 link ch1 Time out time setting 1 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 2 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 3 4 is displayed even when the memory capacity is set to 16 K steps in the parameter setting 4 Latch device Correspond Number and name Content of register ing special device Positioning D 8130 to D 8135 Not used PLSY instruction FNC 57 D 8136 Lower PLSR instruction FNC 59 Accumulated total number D 8137 Upper of pulses output to YOOO and Y001 D 8138 to D 8139 Not used Accumulated number of D 8140 Lower pulses output to Y000 for PLSY instruction
280. type to be displayed D8158 KOO DOO 1 Device No to be displayed i 1 Maximum or minimum value of the corresponding device if the device number is set outside the allowable range The table below shows the device type to be displayed in accordance with the numeric value written in DU DO If any numeric value outside the range from 1 to 10 is written in DO DO the specified device monitor function is disabled Value stored in DOO Device type Input X Output X Auxiliary relay M State S Timer T Counter C 16 bit current value setting value Counter C 32 bit setting value Data register D 16 bit Data register D 32 bit Time display o CO NI oO BY O N gt O Counter C 16 bit current value setting value Counter C 32 bit current value 2 System signal 2 Special data register System Information Description Specified device monitor display status ON The specified device monitor screen is displayed When specified device monitor function or specified device editing function is used OFF Any screen other than the specified device monitor screen is displayed D8159 K A A MA A 9 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 Specified Device Monitor Function Rule in the special device monitor e When a device number not existing in the program is specified while a timer T or counter C is monitored in the spe
281. ue Setting value of C20 Current value of C235 Setting value of C240 A horizontal line is displayed if there is no counter C in the program Example when Counter C is not used 162 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 Monitor Test 3 Test mode operation D Counter C 16 bit gt The operation is same as the test mode operation of timer T S Refer to Subsection 16 5 4 for test mode operation of timer T Counter C 32 bit 1 2 1 Press the OK button on the displayed screen to change the current l 5 value or set value Changing the current value z The current value or set value blinks while it is being changed ss oe cF Ja 2 Use the buttons to change the value as desired Press and hold the or button for 1 second or more to increase or decrease the value at high speed 3 Press the OK button to determine the input At this time the input data is written to the PLC Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L Case of resetting the current value When the OK button is pressed and held for 2 seconds or more while the current value is being changed the current value is reset to 0 and the Resetting the current value _ Qi character R and current value 0 start to blink EE Press the OK button while R and the current value are blinking to write 3 v the current value 0 to the
282. ugh the ON OFF operations 5 of M8251 to M8255 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 91 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 10 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 10 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 10 6 1 Timing of updating of current value When pulses are input to an input terminal for a high speed counter the high speed counter executes up counting or down counting The current values of devices are updated when counting is input 10 6 2 Comparison of current value To compare and output the current value of a high speed counter the following two methods are available 1 Use of comparison instruction CMP instruction band comparison instruction ZCP instruction or contact comparison instruction Use the comparison instruction CMP instruction band comparison instruction ZCP instruction or contact comparison instruction if the comparison result is necessary at counting Use these instructions only when high speed processing is not required because these instructions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained Use the comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS instruction HSCR instruction and HSZ instruction described below if it is necessary to execute comparison and change th
283. unters User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Handling of High speed Counters 10 5 2 1 C235 is set to the up count or down count mode through interruption by the count input X000 When the current value increases from 6 to 5 the output contact is set and when the value decreases from 5 to 6 it is reset The current value increases and decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact However when the counter s value increments from 2 147 483 647 it changes to 2 147 483 648 In the same manner when it decrements from 2 147 483 648 it changes to 2 147 483 647 This type of counter is called a ring counter When RST instruction is executed after the reset input X011 turns on the current counter s value resets to 0 and the output contact is restored The current value output contact operation and reset status of counters are backed up kept even if the power is turned off phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters Examples of program 1 2 For C246 X011 e While X012 is on C246 increments the value when the m RST input terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON and decrements the value when the input terminal X001 X012 switches from OFF to ON C246 D2 D3 0248 a e The down count up count operati
284. ut contact wire the terminals in accordance with the Subsection 9 2 2 Item X000 to X007 X010 to X017 Inout sianal voltage AC power type 24 V DC 10 j DC power type 20 4 V to 26 4 V DC Input sensitivity curren 1 5 mA or less 9 2 2 Instructions for connecting input devices 1 In the case of no voltage contact The input current of this PLC is 7 mA 24 V DC 5 mA 24 V DC in X010 or later Use input devices applicable to this minute current If no voltage contacts switches for large current are used contact failure may occur Input current 7 mA 24 V DC 5 mA 24 V DC Input number X000 to X007 X010 to X017 lt Example gt Products of OMRON Type Model name Type Model name Microswitch Models Z V and D2RV Operation switch Model A3P Proximity switch Model TL Photoelectric switch Model E3S 2 In the case of input device with built in series diode The voltage drop of the series diode should be approx 4 V or less When lead switches with a series LED are used up to two switches can be connected in series Also make sure that the input current is over the input sensing level while the switches are ON PLC Sink input Source input 78 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 3 In the case of input device with built in parallel resistance Use a device having a parallel resistance
285. utput control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case If an overload of the 24 V DC service power supply occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 2 3 4 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions e Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 108 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition u T 5 gt 5 O Ce WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do
286. whether it is mounted correctly If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative The write protect switch of the EEPROM memory cassette was set to ON when data was transferred to the EEPROM memory Confirm the cable connection between programming device and the PLC This error may occur when a cable is disconnected and reconnected during PLC monitoring When the memory cassette is used check whether it is mounted correctly If the problem persists or if the memory cassette is not used something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Turn OFF the power and check the power supply and connection of special adapters Special parameters are set improperly e Confirm troubleshooting for special adapters and set special parameters correctly e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON the power Special parameters are set but special adapters special blocks are not connected Check whether special adapters is connected Check that special parameters with unsupported settings are not set for connected special adapters 139 W gt o O Q O O Q ss os F Q cE op 49 op uny SOL Bunoousejqno QOUBUSIUIE Ln Qi suodo pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue NaS S X4 gin
287. will be automatically written to a special data register of the PLC Variable analog potentiometer FX3s 30M OUT MELSEG 3388 FXas 8388 5 4567 oO onee Eon 0000 oa 14 15 00 ov YO Yi Y2 Y4 COM3 Y7 Yu yi2 Y14 MR ES 24V COMO COM1 COM2 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y10 COM4 Y13 YIS LOT 134 11 2 2 Applicable PLC The following models have built in variable analog potentiometers Applicable PLC 11 2 3 Special data register The current value of each variable analog potentiometer is stored in special data registers shown below Variable analog potentiometer Data register to store current value VR1 Upper side Variable analog potentiometer 1 D8030 Integer from 0 to 255 VR2 Lower side Variable analog potentiometer 2 D8031 Integer from 0 to 255 99 Bojeuy ur ying Buum ndno N A 10 Buum OO s sN SNOEN Ja Buooys jqnosj sgueu zuleN uny S L _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ 1940 a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q owog I ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ SedlAaq eloads gt Sj pow penuljucosiq FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 2 Built in variable analog potentiometer function 11 2 4 Use example of variable analog potentiometer 1 Example 1
288. wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product Make sure to properly wire to the main unit in accordance with the rated voltage current and frequency of each terminal The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product _ Qi suondo pue sun XZ 194 O a s uoisue The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual T a Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual SS Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires dns i Ss Do not solder plate the electric wire ends e Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring Howay N ayjessey The examples of wiring are given under the following conditions
289. ximity sensor Input impedance Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit In the case of source input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the OV terminal of the main unit The OV and 24V terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 80 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 24 V DC input Sink and source input type 9 2 4 Examples of external wiring DC power type 1 Sink input Main unit Fuse I 2 Bor 4 Main unit es eS ee ee ee Ml 3 Three wire sensor Two wire Input proximity sensor impedance ClassD grounding L a a M Three wire sensor Two wire proximity sensor Input impedance Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 8 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S
290. y changes depending on the number of used counters but the input filter value is fixed to 10 us X000 X001 or 50 us X002 to X007 Note that noise above the response frequency may 7 be counted depending on the filter value of the used input o S59 aya 38 97 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of Built in Analog User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 Use of Built in Analog WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise 1 Do not bundle the power line or shield of the analog input output cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line 2 Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side
291. y module Make sure the display module is in parallel with the main s unit Attach the display module to the main unit as shown in z the right figure arrow 2 Remove the display module as shown in the right figure arrow 2 S17 UORONJSU gJ s n d JeD dS Sj pow penuljucosiq 153 FX3S Series Programmable Controllers 16 Display Module FX3S 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 Installation and Removal 16 2 2 Installation and Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together The FX3S 30MT ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example Attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter to the main unit For the attachment method refer to Chapter 7 Caution Make sure to attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter before the display module Remove the upper connector cover A in the right figure Remove part B shown in the right figure using a nipper etc Caution When part B is cut off the display module can not be installed to the main unit directly Attach the display module to the option connector of the expansion board connector conversion adapter Make sure the display module is in parallel with the main unit Attach the display module to the option connector C in the figure on the right of the expansion board connector conversion adapter as shown in the right figure arrow 4
292. you forget the keyword you cannot operate the PLC online from the programming tool depending on the type of the programming tool and the registered keyword 2 Caution on using a peripheral device which does not support the second keyword and customer keyword Sequence programs in which the second keyword and customer keyword are registered cannot be all cleared using a peripheral device that does not support the second keyword and customer keyword 3 Non resettable protect function When the non resettable protect function is set the protect function cannot be reset 141 Boyeuy ul jing Buum ndino NS Jo buum OO s sSN SNOEN O E e 4 nN SE Oo O Q _ Qi suo do pue sun XZ JOO a s uoisue NaS S X4 ginpoy Aejds q owog I ayjessey 0008d 0008W S17 UOHONSU gJ s n d JeD dS sj pow penuljuoosiq FX3S Series Prog rammable Controllers 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Special Adapters 15 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 15 1 Special Adapters 15 1 1 FX3uU 4AD ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout MASS Weight Approx 0 1 kg 0 22 Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Accessories Manual su

FX3S Series User`s Manual - Hardware Edition

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents